Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Camera User Guide
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
•
•
•
Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety
Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
•
•
Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
Wi-Fi Functions
ENGLISH
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
Setting Menu
Accessories
To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter
title at right.
9
10
Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the
future.
Appendix
From chapter title pages, you can access topics by
clicking their titles.
Index
©CANON INC. 2013
CDD-E552-020
1
Cover
•
•
•
Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
Part Names and Conventions in This
Guide
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
• =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a
page number)
Basic Guide
•
•
Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still
images, movies, or both.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
:
Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing still images.
Other Shooting
Modes
Movies
:
Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing movies.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Front dial
Lamp
Mode dial
Hot shoe
Playback Mode
Lens
<
(Flash up)> switch
Wi-Fi Functions
Zoom lever
Flash
Shooting: <i(telephoto)> /
Speaker
Setting Menu
<j(wide angle)>
Ring release button
DC coupler cable port
Memory card/battery cover
Tripod socket
Playback: <k(magnify)> /
Accessories
9
10
<g(index)>
Strap mount
Shutter button
Power button/lamp
Appendix
Index
3
Cover
zzTurning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
•
•
In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
<7>
<z> Front dial on front
<o> Up button on back
Control dial on back
<q> Left button on back
<r> Right button on back
<p> Down button on back
Other Shooting
Modes
Wi-Fi antenna area
(Shortcut)> button
<+(AE lock/FE lock)> /
(Filtering image display)>
button
Remote terminal
P Mode
<
AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
HDMITM terminal
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
<
Playback Mode
<n> button
<
(ISO speed)> /
<
<
(AF frame selector)> /
(Wi-Fi)> button
Wi-Fi Functions
<a(Single-image erase)> button
Screen (LCD monitor)
Diopter adjustment dial
Viewfinder
<f(Manual focus)> / Up button
<e(Macro)> / Left button
Control dial
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Microphone
FUNC./SET button
Appendix
Indicator
<h(Flash)> / Right button
<l(Display)> / Down button
Exposure compensation dial
<1(Playback)> button
Movie button
Index
4
Cover
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2
Mode.....................................91
Table of Contents
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table of Contents...........................5
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
6
P Mode
3
4
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
8
9
Setting Menu
1
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
7
5
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
6
Cover
Common Camera Operations
Before Use
Applying special effects
4
Shoot
Common Camera
Operations
zzUse camera-determined settings
Basic Guide
Vivid Colors
Poster Effect
“Aged” Photos
Advanced Guide
Shooting people well
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I P
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Portraits
Against Snow
Fish-Eye Effect
Miniature Effect
Toy Camera Effect
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Matching specific scenes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Background Defocus
Soft Focus
Monochrome
Playback Mode
S t
Night Scenes
Under Water
Fireworks
Starry Skies
Wi-Fi Functions
zzAdd a date stamp................................................................................. 38
zzUse Face ID................................................................................. 39, 105
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
7
Cover
1
View
Safety Precautions
• Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety
precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used
correctly.
• The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended
to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the
equipment.
• Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Before Use
zzOn a TV.............................................................................................. 163
zzOn a computer ................................................................................... 174
zzErase images......................................................................................114
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
E
Shoot/View Movies
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
Warning
zzShoot movies ................................................................................. 29, 65
Other Shooting
Modes
• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight.
In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when
using the flash.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
c
Print
zzPrint pictures...................................................................................... 176
• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.
Date/time battery (if removable): Dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs,
contact a doctor immediately.
Playback Mode
Save
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• Use only recommended power sources.
Use Wi-Fi Functions
• Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.
• Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
• To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if
it has been dropped or otherwise damaged.
• Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
Accessories
9
10
zzShare images online .......................................................................... 127
Appendix
Index
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
• Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water)
or other liquids.
8
Cover
• Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
Denotes the possibility of injury.
Caution
Before Use
If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior,
immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery pack/batteries.
If the battery charger (for cameras that use one) becomes wet, unplug
it from the outlet and consult your camera retailer or a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Common Camera
Operations
• When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
• Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at bright
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day.
This could damage your eyesight.
• Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
• Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
• Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
• If your camera uses a battery charger, note the following
precautions.
- Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe
away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior
of the power outlet, and the surrounding area.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty areas
These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries.
High temperatures may deform the product.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
- Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the
outlet.
- Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
The battery pack/batteries may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock
or fire. This could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event
that a battery pack leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth,
skin or clothing, immediately flush with water.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
Accessories
9
10
• When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass
may lead to cuts.
Appendix
Index
• On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure
your finger is out of the way when the flash is lowered, to avoid
pinching it.
• Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is
restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
This could result in injury.
9
Cover
• If your camera uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have
different levels of charge together, do not use old and new batteries
together, and do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals
reversed.
Denotes the possibility of damage to the equipment.
Caution
Before Use
• Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a
clear day).
Doing so may damage the image sensor.
Common Camera
Operations
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Basic Guide
• Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
• When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful
not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
Advanced Guide
• On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
• When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do
not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that
it faces the camera body), if your camera has a screen that closes.
• Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the
flash.
This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign
materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove
dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and
damage to the unit.
Other Shooting
Modes
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the camera.
If the battery pack or batteries are left inside the camera, damage caused
by leakage may occur.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals
with tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• If your camera is used with a battery charger, keep the charger
unplugged when not in use. When charging the battery pack, do not
leave it covered with a cloth or put other objects on it.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
Index
• Do not leave the battery pack near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating or explosion,
resulting in fire or damage.
10
Cover
Before Use
Basic Guide
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
playback
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Initial Preparations........................................... 12 Trying the Camera Out..................................... 16
Attaching the Strap................................................12
Holding the Camera ..............................................12
Charging the Battery Pack ....................................12
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card .......13
Setting the Date and Time.....................................14
Display Language .................................................16
Shooting (Smart Auto)...........................................16
Viewing..................................................................18
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
11
Cover
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
Initial Preparations
Before Use
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Attaching the Strap
Basic Guide
1 Insert the battery pack.
zzAttach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
Advanced Guide
zzRemove the cover from the battery, align
the marks on the battery and charger,
Camera Basics
zzOn the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
and insert the battery by pushing it in (
and down ( ).
)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Charge the battery pack.
zzCB-2LC: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug
the charger into a power outlet ( ).
zzCB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Holding the Camera
zzPlace the strap around your neck.
zzWhen shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Playback Mode
CB-2LC
Wi-Fi Functions
zzThe charging lamp turns orange and
charging begins.
Setting Menu
zzWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
Accessories
CB-2LCE
9
10
Appendix
3 Remove the battery pack.
zzAfter unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
Index
(
) and up ( ).
12
Cover
2 Open the cover.
• To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
• For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction
or damage to the product.
Before Use
zzSlide the cover ( ) and open it ( ).
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time
3 Insert the battery pack.
zzWhile pressing the battery lock in the
direction of the arrow, insert the battery
pack as shown and push it in until it clicks
into the locked position.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not
used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. As a
visual reminder of the charging status, attach the battery cover with visible
on a charged battery pack and concealed on an uncharged one.
• The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For
power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for
the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may
damage the battery pack.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzIf you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
P Mode
Terminals Battery
Lock
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
4 Insert the memory card.
zzInsert the memory card facing as shown
until it clicks into the locked position.
zzMake sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
Wi-Fi Functions
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
1 Check the card’s write-protect
tab.
zzRecording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked (downward) position.
Slide the tab up until it clicks into the
unlocked position.
Appendix
Label
Index
13
Cover
Setting the Date and Time
5 Close the cover.
Before Use
zzLower the cover ( ) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position ( ).
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way
is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you
manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one
1 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the power button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Other Shooting
Modes
Remove the battery pack.
zzOpen the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
zzThe battery pack will pop up.
2 Set the date and time.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the date and time.
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Remove the memory card.
zzPush the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzThe memory card will pop up.
Appendix
3 Set the home time zone.
Index
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose your home time zone.
14
Cover
4 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <m> button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
zzTo turn off the camera, press the power
button.
2 Choose [Date/Time].
zzMove the zoom lever to choose the [3]
tab.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time]
screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify
the correct information.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [
] in step 2 and then
3 Change the date and time.
zzFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
zzPress the <n> button to close the
menu.
choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning the <7> dial.
P Mode
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
1 Access the camera menu.
• Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in
date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.
• The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a
charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold
• Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be
displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <n> button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
15
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
Before Use
Trying the Camera Out
Common Camera
Operations
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <1> button.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Advanced Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Access the setting screen.
zzPress and hold the <m> button, and
then immediately press the <n>
button.
1 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the power button.
zzThe startup screen is displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Set the display language.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
zzOnce the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
2 Enter [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
Playback Mode
].
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Index
• The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the
<m> button before you press the <n> button. In this case, press the
<m> button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.
• You can also change the display language by pressing the <n> button
and choosing [Language
] on the [3] tab.
16
Cover
3 Compose the shot.
Shoot.
Before Use
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle).
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
Common Camera
Operations
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Basic Guide
4 Shoot.
Advanced Guide
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Other Shooting
Modes
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
P Mode
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas
will not be recorded.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Elapsed Time
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
move the < > switch to raise the flash.
It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
zzFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
Finish shooting.
zzPress the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
17
Cover
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
<7> dial to browse through images.
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
• You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still
images. When the mode dial is set to [ ], the camera automatically records
a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Viewing
Advanced Guide
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
zzMovies are identified by a [
play movies, go to step 3.
] icon. To
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the <1> button.
zzYour last shot is displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Play movies.
2 Browse through your images.
zzTo view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<7> dial clockwise.
zzPress the <m> button to access the
movie control panel, choose [ ] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button again.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzPlayback now begins, and after the movie
Volume
Accessories
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browse through images quickly.
9
10
is finished, [
] is displayed.
zzTo adjust the volume, press the <o><p>
buttons.
Appendix
Index
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
18
Cover
Before Use
Erasing the Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Erase the image.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <a> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzThe current image is now erased.
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
19
Cover
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and describes shooting and playback
options
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
On/Off................................................................ 21 Shooting Modes ............................................... 23 On-Screen Keyboard ....................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ........21
Shutter Button.................................................. 22
Playback Mode
Shooting Display Options ............................... 23 Indicator Display .............................................. 27
Using the FUNC. Menu .................................... 24 Clock ................................................................. 27
Using Menus..................................................... 25
Wi-Fi Functions
Optical Viewfinder............................................ 22
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
20
Cover
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
On/Off
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting Mode
zzPress the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
zzTo turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Basic Guide
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
Advanced Guide
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off
Camera Basics
Playback Mode
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo turn the camera off, press the <1>
button again.
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
P Mode
• To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button.
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
• The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in
Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by
pressing the <1> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if
• Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
21
Cover
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Optical Viewfinder
To conserve battery power when shooting, you can use the optical
viewfinder instead of the screen. Shoot the same way as when using the
screen.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Deactivate the screen.
zzPress the <p> button several times to
Advanced Guide
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Adjust the diopter.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
zzAs you look through the optical
viewfinder, turn the dial one way or the
other so that images look sharp.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• The area visible in the optical viewfinder may differ slightly from the
image area in your shots.
• At aspect ratios other than 4:3, the area visible in the optical
viewfinder differs from the image area in your shots. Check the
settings before shooting.
2 Press all the way down. (From
the halfway position, press fully
to shoot.)
Playback Mode
zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
• The lens may be partially visible through the optical viewfinder at some zoom
positions.
• Although the camera automatically focuses on subjects, face detection and
focusing is not possible.
• Continuous shooting is not supported in [
will not determine the shooting scene.
Accessories
9
10
• Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the
shutter button halfway.
• Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Appendix
] mode, because the camera
Index
22
Cover
Shooting Modes
Shooting Display Options
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Before Use
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
Common Camera
Operations
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
P, Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Modes
Take a variety of
shots using your
preferred settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Display 1
Display 2
Display Off
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
Other Shooting
Modes
Movie Mode
For shooting movies
You can also shoot
movies when the mode
dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing
the movie button.
P Mode
• Even if the screen is off, it will turn on when you start shooting a
movie.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
• Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots
are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the
brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky
subject motion will not affect recorded images.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
23
Cover
Using the FUNC. Menu
4 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <m> button.
zzThe screen before you pressed the
<m> button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
Before Use
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
Common Camera
Operations
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
1 Access the FUNC. menu.
Camera Basics
zzPress the <m> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a menu item.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose a
menu item.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzAvailable options are shown at the bottom
of the screen.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Options
Menu Items
Setting Menu
Accessories
3 Choose an option.
9
10
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
Appendix
zzOptions labeled with a [
] icon can
Index
be configured by pressing the <n>
button.
zzOptions labeled with a [ ] icon can be
configured by pressing the < > button.
zzOptions labeled with a [ ] icon can be
configured by pressing the < > button.
24
Cover
Using Menus
Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows.
Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4],
playback [1], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending
3 Choose a menu item.
Before Use
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a menu item.
zzFor menu items with options not shown,
first press the <m> or <r> button to
switch screens, and then either press the
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
select the menu item.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Access the menu.
Camera Basics
zzPress the <n> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo return to the previous screen, press
the <n> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a tab.
4 Choose an option.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
P Mode
zzMove the zoom lever to choose a tab.
zzAfter you have pressed the <o><p>
buttons or turned the <7> dial to choose
a tab initially, you can switch between
tabs by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
5 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <n> button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
<n> button in step 1.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
Index
25
Cover
Deleting Characters
On-Screen Keyboard
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Before Use
zzTo delete the previous character,
choose [ ] and press the <m> button.
Alternatively, press the <a> button.
zzHolding down the <a> button will delete
five characters at a time.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Number of Available Characters
Entering Characters
Advanced Guide
Confirming Input and Returning to
the Previous Screen
zzPress the <n> button.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a character,
and then press the <m> button to enter it.
zzThe amount of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are
using.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Moving the Cursor
zzChoose [ ] or [ ] and press the <m>
button. Alternatively, turn the <7> dial.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Entering Line Breaks
zzChoose [
] and press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
Switching Input Modes
zzTo switch to numbers or symbols, choose
Accessories
9
10
[
] and press the <m> button.
Appendix
zzTo switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press
the <m> button.
Index
zzAvailable input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
26
Cover
Indicator Display
Clock
You can check the current time.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
on the camera status.
zzPress and hold the <m> button.
zzThe current time appears.
zzIf you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch
to vertical display. Press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to change
the display color.
Indicator
Status
Basic Guide
Indicator
Color
Camera Status
Advanced Guide
Power Lamp
Green
On
Camera on
On
Ready to shoot (when the flash is deactivated)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Green
transmitting via Wi-Fi
Indicator
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <m> button again to cancel
the clock display.
On
Ready to shoot (when the flash is activated)
P Mode
Orange
Blinking
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• When the camera is off, press and hold the <m> button, then press the power
Playback Mode
• When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the
memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may
corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
button to display the clock.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
27
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
2
Basic Guide
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Advanced Guide
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings............................................................ 29
Shooting (Smart Auto)...........................................29
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode...............................31
Scene Icons ..........................................................33
Image Stabilization Icons ......................................34
On-Screen Frames................................................35
Using Face ID ................................................... 39 Helpful Shooting Features .............................. 47
Registering Face ID Information ...........................39
Shooting................................................................41
Checking and Editing Registered Information.......42
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level.....................47
Magnifying the Area in Focus................................47
Checking for Closed Eyes.....................................48
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Image Customization Features....................... 44 Customizing Camera Operation ..................... 48
Setting Menu
Changing the Aspect Ratio....................................44
Changing Image Resolution (Size) .......................45
Red-Eye Correction...............................................45
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps ...................................................................46
Changing Movie Image Quality.............................46
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam..........................48
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ..........49
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots......49
Common, Convenient Features...................... 35
Accessories
9
10
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .....35
Using the Self-Timer..............................................36
Adding a Date Stamp............................................38
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF).....38
Appendix
Index
28
Cover
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
3 Compose the shot.
Before Use
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle). (A zoom bar
showing the zoom position is displayed.)
Common Camera
Operations
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Basic Guide
Zoom Bar
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Turn the camera on.
Focus Range (approx.)
zzPress the power button.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzThe startup screen is displayed.
4 Shoot.
P Mode
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Enter [
] mode.
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
zzSet the mode dial to [
].
Playback Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzSeveral AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
zzIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
zzFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
move the < > switch to raise the flash.
It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
29
Cover
Shoot.
Resize the subject and
recompose the shot as needed.
zzTo resize the subject, repeat the
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded.
Before Use
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
Common Camera
Operations
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzWhen you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Finish shooting.
zzPress the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Other Shooting
Modes
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
P Mode
zzRecording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
Elapsed Time
Playback Mode
• The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically
attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-
area White Balance).
time.
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas
will not be recorded.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Appendix
Index
30
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
• A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
] mode, because
Before Use
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
• Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
Advanced Guide
1 Enter [ ] mode.
• Digest movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
zzFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press
• Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.
Other Shooting
Modes
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording
time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds.
2 Compose the shot.
P Mode
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
focus.
• Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
• If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in
advance. Press the <n> button, and on the [4] tab, set [Digest Type] to
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzFor more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3 Shoot.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Accessories
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the
9
10
zzThe camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Appendix
Index
31
Cover
Before Use
Still Images/Movies
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
• To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is
• Keep your fingers away from the
microphone while shooting movies.
Blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may
cause the recording to sound muffled.
Microphone
blank in [
] mode, press the <p> button.
Basic Guide
• If the camera is turned on while the <p> button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
<n> button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then press
the <q><r> buttons to choose [Off].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
• Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
• Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is
shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting
distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the
same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Other Shooting
Modes
• A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred
by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
• If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
• The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when
you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing
• To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
• A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates
that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging.
Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press
the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press
it again.
• The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Audio is recorded in stereo.
Playback Mode
• Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when
there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the <n> button,
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
• Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is
displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness,
and colors used.
32
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the
Before Use
background color of [ ] is orange.
Scene Icons
• When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will
be displayed.
Common Camera
Operations
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
• When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At
Close Range icons will be displayed.
Basic Guide
• When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be
displayed.
Advanced Guide
Background
Normal Backlit
Dark*
Sunsets Spotlights
Camera Basics
Subject
People
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed.
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
In Motion
Shadows on Face
Smiling
Other Shooting
Modes
• If the flash is set to [ ], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be
displayed.
–
P Mode
• Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed
when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old)
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Sleeping
Babies
Playback Mode
Smiling
actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your
expected effect, color, or brightness.
Wi-Fi Functions
Sleeping
Children (In Motion)
Other Subjects
In Motion
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
At Close Range
* Tripod Used
Index
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
33
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Continuous Shooting Scenes
Image Stabilization Icons
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [W].
Common Camera
Operations
]
Basic Guide
and [
] modes.
Image stabilization for movies,
reducing strong camera shake,
Advanced Guide
Image stabilization for still
images
: Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
as when shooting while walking
(Dynamic IS)
Camera Basics
Smiling (including Babies)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the image determined to be the best.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image stabilization for slow
camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto
(Powered IS)
: Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF assist beam will not light up, the flash will not
fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.
Image stabilization for still
images when panning*
Other Shooting
Modes
Sleeping (including Babies)
Children
P Mode
No image stabilization, because
the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other
means
Image stabilization for macro
shots (Hybrid IS)
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
W: So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Playback Mode
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow
subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera
shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving
vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
Wi-Fi Functions
• In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
• Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.
Setting Menu
IS icon is not displayed.
Accessories
9
10
• When you want to shoot single images only, press the <m> button, choose
• In [ ] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
[
] in the menu, and then select [ ].
Appendix
Index
34
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Common, Convenient Features
Before Use
On-Screen Frames
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects
subjects you are aiming the camera at.
Still Images
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
In [
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 20x enlargement.
Basic Guide
•
•
A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Move the zoom lever toward
<i>.
zzHold the lever until zooming stops.
zzZooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame
will remain on the screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and
image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
Zoom Factor
2 Move the zoom lever toward
Playback Mode
<i> again.
zzThe camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
35
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending
on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear
grainy.
Before Use
Using the Self-Timer
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter
button.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably
grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
following step 1.
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
in the menu, and then choose the []]
zzOnce the setting is complete, []] is
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm
film equivalent).
28 – 560 mm (28 – 140 mm with optical zoom alone)
• To deactivate digital zoom, press the <n> button, choose [Digital Zoom]
on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Shoot.
zzFor Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzFor Movies: Press the movie button.
Appendix
Index
36
Cover
zzOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Customizing the Self-Timer
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
zzTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [$].
Advanced Guide
zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<
> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
2 Configure the setting.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the [Delay]
time, either press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the number
of [Shots], and then press the <m>
button.
[
] in step 1.
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Movies
P Mode
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have
pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing
the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [$] is
displayed.
Playback Mode
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
zzOnce the setting is complete, [[] is
displayed.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Appendix
• When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are
determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the
flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop
automatically when the memory card becomes full.
Index
• When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the
shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
37
Cover
Still Images
• Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may
cause it to be printed twice.
Before Use
Adding a Date Stamp
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
Still Images
Movies
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Date
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
In [AUTO] mode, shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
Stamp
] on the [4] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Specify Tracking AF.
zzPress the <o> button.
zz[ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
zzAim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the
shutter button halfway.
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Shoot.
Setting Menu
zzAs you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
zzA blue frame is displayed, and the
camera will keep the subject in focus and
image brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
3 Shoot.
Accessories
9
10
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
• Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
zzPress the <o> button to cancel Tracking AF.
• Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly,
or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely.
38
Cover
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based
Basic Guide
on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Personal Information
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID,
and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.
Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be
recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful
when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting
images online where many others can view them.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add to Registry],
and then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
•
When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names,
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a New Face],
and then press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
39
Cover
2 Register face information.
zzAim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
zzA white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the date.
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Save the settings.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Save], and then
press the <m> button.
P Mode
zzAfter a message is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Register the person’s name and
birthday.
zzPress the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
5 Continue registering face
information.
zzTo register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Index
40
Cover
• Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or
scene differs drastically from the registered face information.
• If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered
information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will
allow for easier detection of registered faces.
• If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue
shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during
• Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should
displayed, but they will be recorded with images.
• Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info]
not displayed.
• The flash will not fire when following step 2.
• If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
] mode.
Basic Guide
• You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person
as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that
person when shooting.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
zzWhen you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
• If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
• You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple
• In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be
recorded in still images.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
zzShoot.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzDisplayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as
the registered person if they share similar facial features.
Index
41
Cover
3 Check or edit the information as
needed.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
Before Use
zzTo check a name or birthday, access
the [Edit Profile] screen by pressing the
<o><p> buttons or turning the <7>
dial and then pressing the <m> button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
names or birthdays as described in step
3 of “Registering Face ID Information”
zzTo check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button. Press the <m>
button on the screen displayed, choose
face information to erase by pressing the
<o><p><q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial, and then the <m> button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info]
Common Camera
Operations
screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Edit Info] and press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a person to check or
edit.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the person to
check or edit, and then press the <m>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Appendix
Index
• You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered
with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded
in images.
42
Cover
3 Choose the face info to
overwrite.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the face info
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
filled.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Access the [Add Face Info]
screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Info] and press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Register face information.
zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
register the new face information.
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Choose the name of the person
whose face info you want to
overwrite.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the name
of a person whose face info you want
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the
steps above to overwrite face information.
• You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least
one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzIf five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
zzIf less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Appendix
Index
43
Cover
Image Customization Features
Before Use
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face
ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Basic Guide
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Info].
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
zzOnce the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
2 Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the name
of a person to erase, and then press the
<m> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Setting Menu
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or
postcard sizes.
Accessories
9
10
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard-
definition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x
5-inch or A-series sizes.
• If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
Appendix
Index
Square aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
• Not available in [ ] mode.
44
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
Red-Eye Correction
Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as
Common Camera
Operations
follows.
Basic Guide
1 Access the [Built-in Flash
Settings] screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
zzOnce the setting is complete, [R] is
displayed.
Wi-Fi Functions
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
Setting Menu
Accessories
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
9
10
zz[ ]: For e-mailing images.
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
A3 – A5 (11.7 x
16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
Appendix
Index
5 x 7 in.
Postcard
3.5 x 5 in.
• Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes
(if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for
example).
• Not available in [ ] mode.
45
Cover
Movies
Before Use
Changing Movie Image Quality
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,
• You can also access the screen in step 2 by holding down the <r> button for
at least one second.
Common Camera
Operations
• You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the
<r> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
Basic Guide
Still Images
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [
in the menu, and choose the desired
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
In [
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [4] tab, and then
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Image
Quality
Resolution
1920 x 1080*
Frame Rate
Details
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Setting Menu
60 fps
For shooting in Full HD
] enables movies
Accessories
[
9
10
with smoother motion
1920 x 1080*
1280 x 720
640 x 480
30 fps
30 fps
30 fps
Appendix
For shooting in HD
Index
For shooting in standard
definition
• After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set
[Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by
mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
* Fine Detail Movie Processing (This function quickly processes a large amount of
information, making it possible to record even finer details in movies.)
• In [
], [
], and [
] modes, black bars displayed on the top and
• Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.
bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.
46
Cover
Still Images
Helpful Shooting Features
Before Use
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Basic Guide
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera is
level from front to back and left to right.
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Display the electronic level.
zzPress the <p> button several times to
display the electronic level.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
2 Straighten the camera.
zzIf the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2 Check the focus.
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
Wi-Fi Functions
Back or
Forward
Left or Right
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
• If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the <n> button, and
on the [4] tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose
the electronic level.
• The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
• If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be
updated automatically to match the camera orientation.
• Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
Appendix
• The area in focus will not be magnified when you press the shutter
button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close
to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement.
Index
47
Cover
Customizing Camera Operation
• Not available in [ ] mode.
Before Use
Customize shooting functions on the MENU [4] tab as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Still Images
Basic Guide
Still Images
Checking for Closed Eyes
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Advanced Guide
[
their eyes.
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [4] tab, and then
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2 Shoot.
Accessories
zz[ ] flashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
zzTo restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
9
10
Appendix
Index
• When you have specified multiple shots in [$] mode, this function is only
available for the final shot.
• A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have
• This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode
48
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Common Camera
Operations
eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
Basic Guide
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1 Access the [Built-in Flash
Settings] screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
Advanced Guide
1 Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
P Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [Display Time].
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Setting Menu
Quick
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
Accessories
9
10
2 sec., 4 sec., Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed,
Appendix
8 sec.
Hold
Off
you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.
No image display after shots.
Index
49
Cover
Before Use
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
Basic Guide
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold]
Advanced Guide
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Off
Displays only the image.
Detailed
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
[Off] and cannot be changed.
• By pressing the <p> button while an image is displayed after shooting, you
can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are
not changed. You can also delete the image, by pressing the <a> button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
50
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
3
Basic Guide
Other Shooting Modes
Advanced Guide
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)...................................................57
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect) ..............................................58
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus) ..........................................58
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect .........................59
Shooting in Monochrome ......................................59
Specific Scenes................................................ 52
Special Modes for Other Purposes ................ 60
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)......................................................60
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)..................................62
Shooting Various Movies ................................ 65
Playback Mode
Image Effects (Creative Filters) ...................... 54
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)..........................................55
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)................56
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode ..............................65
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies ....................66
(Fish-Eye Effect) ...................................................56
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
51
Cover
Specific Scenes
Still Images
Before Use
Shoot evening scenes without
using a tripod (Handheld
NightScene)
zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
zzA single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
Common Camera
Operations
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
Basic Guide
1 Enter [K] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [K].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [I] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Movies
P Mode
ꢀSShoot underwater (Underwater)
zzNatural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
zzThis mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Shoot.
Playback Mode
Still Images
Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
IShoot portraits (Portrait)
zzTake shots of people with a softening
effect.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Appendix
PShoot with snowy backgrounds
(Snow)
Index
zzBright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
52
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Before Use
tShoot fireworks (Fireworks)
zzVivid shots of fireworks.
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
zzPress the <q> button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
• In [ ] and [S] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
• Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
• In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting
conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
• In [t] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Shoot.
Focusing Range
Description
Playback Mode
Underwater
Macro
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer
shots.
Wi-Fi Functions
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities
when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective
for moving subjects.
• When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
] mode instead
Setting Menu
Quick
8
• In [t] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
range.
Index
53
Cover
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Before Use
• In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
• In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
• In [8] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this
case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Common Camera
Operations
1 Enter [ ] mode.
Basic Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].
Advanced Guide
• [
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose a shooting
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Shoot.
Playback Mode
Still Images
Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
Shoot in vivid colors
(Super Vivid)
zzShots in rich, vivid colors.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
54
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent
Before Use
you from obtaining the desired results.
Common Camera
Operations
Posterized shots (Poster Effect)
zzShots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
• If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on
a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure
you obtain the desired results.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adding Artistic Effects
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
P Mode
[
].
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out
highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast
shots.
zzPress the < > button, choose an effect
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
Playback Mode
the <7> dial), and then press the <
>
Wi-Fi Functions
button again.
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Setting Menu
Art Standard
Art Vivid
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
1 Choose [ ].
Accessories
9
10
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Art Bold
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Appendix
[
].
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark ambiance.
Index
2 Shoot.
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
55
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Before Use
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Common Camera
Operations
photographs. Choose from five effect levels.
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [ ].
1 Choose [ ].
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[
].
[
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose an effect
level.
2 Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose an effect
level.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Shoot.
3 Shoot.
Playback Mode
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
Wi-Fi Functions
results.
results.
Setting Menu
• Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not
• The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
56
Cover
Still Images
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Movies
Before Use
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Common Camera
Operations
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and
below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the
zoom before shooting.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
1 Choose [ ].
Other Shooting
Modes
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
P Mode
[
].
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the <q><r> buttons
in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the <o><p>
buttons.
• Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.
• Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at an aspect
zzA white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
Playback Mode
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.
zzPress the < > button.
zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the <7> dial to move it.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
Index
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the speed.
4 Return to the shooting screen
and shoot.
zzPress the < > button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
57
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Two consecutive images are captured each time you shoot and processed
into a single image, so that the subject stands out against a blurred
background.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [ ].
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
[
].
Other Shooting
Modes
[
].
2 Choose a color tone.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose a color
tone.
2 Shoot.
P Mode
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all the
way down, the camera will shoot twice
and process the images.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Playback Mode
3 Shoot.
zzA blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
Wi-Fi Functions
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm
Cool
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Setting Menu
• Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
Accessories
9
10
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
Appendix
• For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and
ensure ample distance between the subject and background.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
the images.
results.
Index
• To adjust the effect level, turn the <z> dial.
58
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
Shooting in Monochrome
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
Common Camera
Operations
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [ ].
1 Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Camera Basics
[
].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose a color tone.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose a color
tone.
2 Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose an effect
level.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
P Mode
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Shoot.
3 Shoot.
B/W
Black and white shots.
Playback Mode
Sepia
Blue
Sepia tone shots.
• Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired
results.
Wi-Fi Functions
Blue and white shots.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
59
Cover
Special Modes for Other Purposes
• You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
• The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and
open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.
Before Use
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
Camera Basics
Using the Wink Self-Timer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Choose [ ].
1 Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the < > button.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the < > button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the < > button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the < > button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
2 Aim the camera at a person.
zzEach time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
zzTo pause smile detection, press the <p>
button. Press the <p> button again to
resume detection.
Appendix
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
Index
• Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will
continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
60
Cover
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
4 Face the camera and wink.
zzThe camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
Advanced Guide
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.
• Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
• If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
Other Shooting
Modes
[
4 Join the subjects in the
shooting area and look at the
camera.
zzAfter the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
P Mode
• If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.
Still Images
Playback Mode
Using the Face Self-Timer
Wi-Fi Functions
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
shots.
Setting Menu
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
1 Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the < > button.
• Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area,
the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
Index
[
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the < > button.
61
Cover
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
• To disable image processing that makes stars more prominent, choose MENU
► [4] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Off].
position before shooting.
Before Use
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the
image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the < > button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a
single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots, the
camera shoots continuously. Each shooting session lasts up to about two
hours. Check the battery level in advance.
P Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
Playback Mode
1 Choose [ ].
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the < > button.
Setting Menu
3 Shoot.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
2 Specify the duration of the
Index
shooting session.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the
shooting duration.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
3 Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
62
Cover
4 Shoot.
Movies
Before Use
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Basic Guide
Still images are captured continuously over a specified duration and
combined to create a movie. The camera shoots once each minute, and no
sound is recorded.
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zzTo cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again.
Advanced Guide
Stars move quickly during playback, so you can view their movement
in a short time. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours, and
many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory card space in
advance.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is saved.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Choose [ ].
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
P Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the < > button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Specify the duration of the
shooting session.
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the
shooting duration.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
3 Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Index
63
Cover
4 Check the brightness.
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
• If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point
is saved.
• Maximum available shooting duration varies depending on free
space on the memory card.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
check image brightness.
Basic Guide
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
zzTo adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level. Check brightness again
by taking another shot.
Advanced Guide
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
the images.
• To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose MENU ►
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[4] tab ► [Save
Stills] ► [On]. Note that these individual images are
managed as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is
5 Shoot.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the movie button. [Busy] is
displayed briefly, and then shooting
begins.
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
] is displayed
P Mode
zzThe indicator blinks throughout the
shooting session.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzThe camera operates in Eco mode
Setting Menu
Estimated Shooting and Playback Times
Session Time
Accessories
9
10
Playback Time
Appendix
[120']
[90']
[60']
Approx. 8 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 4 sec.
Index
64
Cover
Movies
Movies
Before Use
Shooting Various Movies
Common Camera
Operations
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of –3 to +3.
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode
Basic Guide
1 Enter [E] mode.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [E].
1 Lock the exposure.
zzPress the < > button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas
will not be recorded.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo unlock the exposure, press the <
button again.
>
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the settings to suit
2 Adjust the exposure.
P Mode
zzTurn the <7> dial to adjust the exposure,
3 Shoot.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
as you watch the screen.
zzPress the movie button.
zzTo stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
65
Cover
Movies
• Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the
zoom lever.
• Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the
movie button.
Before Use
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note
that sound is not recorded.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Choose [ ].
• You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software
Advanced Guide
zzSet the mode dial to [E].
zzPress the <m> button, choose [E]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
in the menu, and then choose [
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a frame rate.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired frame
P Mode
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzA bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.
30 sec.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
Playback Time (For a 30-
Frame Rate
Image Quality
sec. Clip)
Approx. 4 min.
Approx. 2 min.
240 fps
120 fps
(320 x 240)
(640 x 480)
66
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
4
Basic Guide
P Mode
Advanced Guide
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
•
•
•
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [G] mode.
[G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [G], make sure the function is available in that mode
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)............... 68 Color and Continuous Shooting..................... 74 Flash.................................................................. 85
Adjusting White Balance .......................................74
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)............75
Continuous Shooting.............................................76
Shooting Range and Focusing ....................... 77
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths
(Step Zoom) ..........................................................77
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro).................................78
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode...........................78
Digital Tele-Converter............................................80
Changing the AF Frame Mode..............................81
Changing the Focus Setting..................................84
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select).....84
Shooting with the AF Lock.....................................85
Changing the Flash Mode.....................................85
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation .......86
Shooting with the FE Lock ....................................87
Changing the Flash Timing ...................................87
Image Brightness (Exposure) ......................... 68
Adjusting Image Brightness
Setting Menu
(Exposure Compensation) ....................................68
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock) ..............................................................69
Changing the Metering Method.............................69
Changing the ISO Speed ......................................70
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR).......................................................71
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)...........72
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)..............72
Using the ND Filter................................................73
Accessories
9
10
Shooting RAW Images..................................... 88
Appendix
Other Settings .................................................. 89
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)......................................................89
Changing the IS Mode Settings ............................89
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Index
Information ............................................................90
67
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Before Use
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Basic Guide
1 Enter [G] mode.
Advanced Guide
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
2zzSCeutsthteommoizdeedtihael tos[eGtt].ings as
then shoot.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAs you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzThe correction level you specified is now
displayed.
P Mode
• If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button
halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this
• Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.
automatically adjusted for movie recording.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
68
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock)
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
Changing the Metering Method
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Advanced Guide
1 Lock the exposure.
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the < > button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zz[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.
Evaluative
P Mode
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
zzAfter one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Determines the average brightness of light across the entire
image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area
as more important.
Center
Weighted Avg.
Playback Mode
• AE: Auto Exposure
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame). You
Spot
Wi-Fi Functions
• After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed
and aperture value by turning the <7> dial (Program Shift).
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
69
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Changing the ISO Speed
Common Camera
Operations
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
zzPress the < > button, turn the <7> dial
to choose the ISO speed, and then press
the <m> button.
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
1 Set the metering method to [ ].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Spot AE Point] on the [4] tab, and then
zzThe Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
AUTO
P Mode
80, 100, 125, 160, 200
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at
twilight.
Low
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000,
10000, 12800
Playback Mode
For shooting night scenes, or in dark
rooms.
High
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [AUTO],
press the shutter button halfway.
Accessories
9
10
• Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there
may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.
• Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce
subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look
grainy.
Appendix
Index
70
Cover
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Still Images
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [4] tab, and then choose
Advanced Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when the ISO speed
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
71
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
Common Camera
Operations
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time
you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure
(relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [ ].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
zzPress the <m> button, choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] in the menu, and then choose [
]
Other Shooting
Modes
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <z> or <7> dial
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the < > button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function.
• You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the <n>
shot.
Index
72
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as
follows.
Shadow Correct
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose
] in the menu, and then choose [
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
[
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
] is
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
ND filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to
3 stops).
P Mode
Available ISO Speed
Option
Details
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
–
Playback Mode
Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out
highlights
AUTO, 80 – 12800
AUTO, 160 – 3200
AUTO, 320 – 3200
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <m> button, choose
Tone down highlights by about 200% relative to
the brightness level of [
Tone down highlights by about 400% relative to
the brightness level of [ ].
].
[
] in the menu, and then choose [
]
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported
range indicated here.
Index
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still
and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode]
to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera
• ND: Neutral Density
73
Cover
Color and Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
Custom White Balance
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Adjusting White Balance
Basic Guide
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
Advanced Guide
zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White
zzAim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the < > button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzThe tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting
Auto
conditions.
Playback Mode
Day Light
Cloudy
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Still Images
Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.
Manually Correcting White Balance
For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting
and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.
Setting Menu
Tungsten
You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the
effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter
or color-compensating filter.
For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or cool-
white fluorescent lighting.
Accessories
9
10
Fluorescent
Appendix
For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored
fluorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H
Flash
1 Configure the setting.
zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White
balance option.
Index
For shooting with the flash.
h
Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones
down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.
Underwater
Custom
S
zzTurn the <z> dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
74
Cover
Still Images
Movies
2 Configure advanced settings.
zzTo configure more advanced settings,
press the <n> button and turn
the <z> or <7> dial to adjust the
correction level.
Before Use
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzTo reset the correction level, press the
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Advanced Guide
<
> button.
zzPress the <n> button to complete
the setting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.
Other Shooting
Modes
–
My Colors Off
Vivid
P Mode
• B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images
sharper.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color
temperature conversion filter density)
• You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen
Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued
images.
Neutral
Playback Mode
Sepia
B/W
Creates sepia tone images.
Wi-Fi Functions
Creates black and white images.
Setting Menu
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid
Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling
images on positive film.
Positive Film
Accessories
9
10
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Appendix
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and
other blue subjects more vivid.
Index
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage,
and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other
Custom Color
75
Cover
Still Images
• With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may
change. These settings may not produce the expected results with
some skin tones.
Before Use
Continuous Shooting
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Custom Color
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Access the setting screen.
zzFollow the steps in “Changing Image
P Mode
2 Shoot.
choose [ ], and then press the <
button.
>
zzHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Mode
Description
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
an option, and then specify the value by
pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial.
zzFor stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Wi-Fi Functions
Continuous
Continuous
W
Continuous shooting and focusing.
Shooting AF* [AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
Index
zzPress the < > button to complete the
setting.
• As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
• Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
76
Cover
Shooting Range and Focusing
recorded will be determined in the first shot, and will be recorded in the same
place for further shots.
Before Use
Still Images
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths
(Step Zoom)
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Images Displayed during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode is
Advanced Guide
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 or 140 mm
(35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the
angle of view of those focal lengths.
managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
in the upper left of the screen.
] is displayed
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Assign [
] to the <z> dial
also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a focal length.
zzTurn the <z> dial clockwise until it
clicks to change the focal length from
28 mm to 35 mm. Keep turning the <z>
dial to increase the focal length, which
changes to 50, 85, 100, and 140 mm at
each click.
• Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image
temporarily ungrouped.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn
the <z> dial.
Accessories
9
10
not change the zoom factor. However, turning the <z> dial counterclockwise
will set the focal length to 140 mm.
Appendix
Index
77
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Common Camera
Operations
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position
you specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range”
Basic Guide
zzPress the <q> button, choose [e] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [f].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <o> button, and then press
the <m> button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [e] is
displayed.
Other Shooting
Modes
zz[f] and the MF indicator are displayed.
P Mode
• If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
• Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Specify the general focal
position.
• To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting
Playback Mode
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display area,
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the general focal
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
MF Indicator
position, and then press the <m> button.
Appendix
zzTo adjust the magnification, press the
<r> button.
Index
zzMove the focusing frame as needed
78
Cover
3 Fine-tune the focus.
zzPress the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
Still Images
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection
as needed.
Basic Guide
zzTo cancel manual focus, press the <q>
button.
Advanced Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [4] tab, and
settings cannot be changed.
but the magnified display will not appear.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
P Mode
• To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.
• To hide or enlarge the magnified display area, press the <n> button and
• To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, press the <n> button and set [Safety MF] on the [4] tab to [Off]
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
79
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Before Use
Digital Tele-Converter
Common Camera
Operations
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x.
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it
would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom
factor.
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
zzThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then choose [
]
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
2 Configure the setting.
Playback Mode
zzPress the < > button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial.
• The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 42.0 – 210.0 mm
and 56.0 – 280.0 mm (35mm film equivalent).
• The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the
way toward <i> for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge
the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
• You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the <n>
shot.
80
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Before Use
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)
Common Camera
Operations
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
Basic Guide
1 Prepare to move the AF frame.
zzPress the < > button. The AF frame
turns orange.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Move and resize the AF frame.
zzTurn the <7> dial to move the AF frame,
or press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
to move it by a smaller amount.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
zzTo return the AF frame to the original
P Mode
position in the center, keep the <
>
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
FlexiZone/Center
button held down.
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.
zzTo reduce the AF frame size, press the
<n> button. Press it again to restore
it to the original size.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
3 Finish the setup process.
Setting Menu
zzPress the < > button.
• To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner,
first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold
the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button
halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all
the way down (Focus Lock).
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
81
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Face AiAF
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
•
•
Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Tracking AF].
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected
faces.
Advanced Guide
zzFollow the steps in “Changing the AF
[Tracking AF].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zz[ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
•
•
When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,
within a certain range.
Other Shooting
Modes
After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
zzAim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the <
button.
P Mode
>
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the
areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press
the shutter button halfway.
• Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzWhen the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
zzIf no subject is detected, [ ] is
displayed.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
• No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Index
zzTo cancel tracking, press the < > button
again.
82
Cover
3 Shoot.
Still Images
Before Use
zzPress the shutter button halfway. [
]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting with Servo AF
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
Basic Guide
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzEven after your shot, [ ] is still
displayed and the camera continues to
track the subject.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Focus.
zzThe focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move
too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the
background too closely.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
Playback Mode
• [e] is not available.
• Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
• In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this
case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF
frame mode.
• If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,
and then press it halfway again.
Wi-Fi Functions
• The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway
without pressing the <
center of the screen.
> button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the
Setting Menu
• If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people
However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as
a person detected with Face ID.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• AF lock shooting is not available.
Index
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
83
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Changing the Focus Setting
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
Common Camera
Operations
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead,
you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button
halfway.
Basic Guide
1 Prepare the camera for Face
Select.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Enter Face Select mode.
zzAim the camera at the person’s face and
press the < > button.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
zzEven if the subject moves, the face frame
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera
constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway.
On
[
] follows the subject within a certain
Playback Mode
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly.
range.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzIf a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
Setting Menu
3 Choose the face to focus on.
zzTo switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the < > button.
zzAfter you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
is displayed, and the specified AF frame
mode screen is displayed again.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
84
Cover
4 Shoot.
Flash
Before Use
zzPress the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
Changing the Flash Mode
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are
not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Raise the flash.
zzMove the < > switch.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <r> button, choose a flash
mode (either press the <q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Movies
Shooting with the AF Lock
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Playback Mode
1 Lock the focus.
zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the <o> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
• The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the <r> button
when the flash is lowered. Move the < > switch to raise the flash,
then configure the setting.
Setting Menu
zzThe focus is now locked, and [f] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
zzTo unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the <o>
button again.
Accessories
9
10
[
] Auto
Appendix
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
Index
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
[h] On
Fires for each shot.
[Z] Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
85
Cover
Still Images
• In [Z] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
• In [Z] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject
does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
zzRaise the flash, press the <r> button and
immediately turn the <z> dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the <m> button.
zzThe correction level you specified is now
displayed.
Advanced Guide
[!] Off
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For shooting without the flash.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the
shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-
out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate
automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing
[Off].
• You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by choosing [X] in
[4] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
follows (except when an optional external flash is mounted).
- Press and hold the <r> button for at least one second.
- When the flash is up, press the <r> button and immediately press the
<n> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
86
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Shooting with the FE Lock
shots.
Changing the Flash Timing
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
1 Raise the flash and set it to [h]
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Lock the flash exposure.
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the < > button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
zzThe flash fires, and when
P Mode
[
] is displayed, the flash output level is
retained.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
1st-curtain
2nd-curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
zzAfter one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• FE: Flash Exposure
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
87
Cover
Still Images
• When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
Before Use
Shooting RAW Images
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use
minimal loss of image quality.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal
image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original,
unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image
quality.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with
essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The
data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must
first use the software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the
software.
Index
88
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Other Settings
Before Use
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [IS Mode], and then choose the
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
Other Shooting
Modes
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
Continuous
P Mode
Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
Playback Mode
• If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
89
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Before Use
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to
a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
Basic Guide
During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the
subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as
rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, you can disable this image stabilization.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Night
Display] on the [4] tab, and then choose
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow the steps in “Changing the IS
[IS Settings] screen.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.
Playback Mode
• You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at
the same size shown before shooting.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
90
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
5
Basic Guide
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Advanced Guide
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
•
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode).............. 92 Customization for Shooting Styles ................ 95 Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout) ..................................... 98
Customizing Display Information...........................95
Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and Control
Dial........................................................................96
Convenient Control Using the <
Button....................................................................97
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ............ 93
Setting Menu
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu.................98
Saving Shooting Settings......................................99
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)...........................................................100
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values
([M] Mode)........................................................ 93
Adjusting the Flash Output....................................94
Accessories
9
10
> or Movie
Appendix
Index
91
Cover
Still Images
• With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay
before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove
noise.
• When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS
• Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed
to 1/2000 second before shooting.
Before Use
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Enter [M] mode.
Camera Basics
zzSet the mode dial to [M].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Set the shutter speed.
zzTurn the <z> dial to set the shutter
speed.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
P Mode
• [M]: Time value
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the
Playback Mode
Shutter Speed (sec.)
AUTO, 80 – 3200
AUTO, 80 – 12800
15 – 1.3
Wi-Fi Functions
1 – 1/4000
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
92
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Before Use
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Common Camera
Operations
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Enter [B] mode.
Camera Basics
zzSet the mode dial to [B].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Enter [D] mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Set the aperture value.
zzTurn the <z> dial to set the aperture
value.
zzSet the mode dial to [D].
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzTurn the <z> dial to set the shutter
speed, and turn the <7> dial to set the
aperture value.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzAn exposure level mark based on your
specified value is shown on the exposure
Playback Mode
• Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button
halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.
Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in
white, or use safety shift (see below).
level indicator for comparison to the
standard exposure level.
Aperture Value
Wi-Fi Functions
Shutter Speed
zzThe exposure level mark is shown in
Setting Menu
orange when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
Exposure Level
Standard
• [B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)
• To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when
standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the <n> button
Accessories
9
10
Exposure
Level Indicator
Appendix
Exposure Level
Mark
Index
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the
Shutter Speed (sec.)
250 – 40
30 – 1.3
80
80 – 3200
1 – 1/4000
80 – 12800
93
Cover
Still Images
• After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level
may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
• Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter
speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the
same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [h].
• Use a sufficiently charged battery when shooting with the shutter
speed set from 40 to 250 seconds, because the longer shooting
time shortens battery life more than other shooting methods.
• To have both the shutter speed and aperture value automatically
adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button
halfway and press the < > button. Note that standard exposure
may not be possible with some settings.
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
Choose from the three flash levels in [D] mode.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Enter [D] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [D].
Advanced Guide
2 Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzRaise the flash, press the <r> button and
immediately turn the <z> dial to choose
the flash level, and then press the <m>
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
zzOnce the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
P Mode
• [D]: Manual
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
[
]: low, [
]: medium, [
]: high
• Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method
• The battery level indicated is based on estimated battery consumption under
the current shutter speed setting. Changing the shutter speed may cause this
level to be updated.
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial adjusts the
[Flash Output].
• You can set the flash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing MENU
[Manual].
• You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen as follows
(except when an optional external flash is mounted).
- Press and hold the <r> button for at least one second.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
- When the flash is up, press the <r> button and immediately press the
<n> button.
Index
94
Cover
3 Configure the setting.
Customization for Shooting Styles
Before Use
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then press the <m> button. Items you
choose for display are labeled with [ ].
zzSelected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Still Images
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
Customizing Display Information
displayed in each display when the <p> button is pressed in shooting
screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Info
Grid Lines
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Displays a reference grid.
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [4] tab, and
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Electronic
Level
Other Shooting
Modes
Histogram
P Mode
2 Choose [LCD/Viewfinder].
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial, and then press the
<m> button to configure custom displays
• Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
• Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be
displayed in some shooting modes.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
[
], [ ] or [ ] which are displayed
Wi-Fi Functions
when the <p> button is pressed.
• Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
zzPress the <m> button to add [ ] ([ ],
Setting Menu
[
], or [ ]) to custom displays so that
Accessories
they do not display when the <p> button
is pressed.
9
10
Appendix
zzNote that [ ] cannot be applied to [LCD/
Viewfinder] custom display currently in
use.
Index
95
Cover
Still Images
Before Use
Assignable Functions
Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and
Functions you can assign to the front dial and control dial vary depending
on shooting mode. On the setting screen, you can assign aspect ratio
Common Camera
Operations
Control Dial
Assign commonly used functions to the front dial and control dial, by
shooting mode.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
by
in the following table.
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Set
z7Func.] on the [4] tab, and then
Camera Basics
Shooting Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
D B M
G
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
m
z
7
M B M
Front Dial 1
Front Dial 2
Front Dial 3
Control Dial
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
item.
B,
z B B M
P Mode
zzTo configure the settings, press the
<o><p> buttons, choose an item (either
press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial), and then turn the
<z> dial to change the function.
7
M,
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
z B, M B M
Playback Mode
7
z
Wi-Fi Functions
7 B, M B M
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• When multiple functions are assigned to the <7> dial, press the <
to switch between them.
using <z> dial.
> button
Appendix
Index
96
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set Shortcut button] or [ ] in [Set
button].
Before Use
Convenient Control Using the < > or Movie
Button
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the < > or
movie button.
Common Camera
Operations
• Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current
shooting mode or under current function conditions.
• With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data
• With [%], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks the focus. [%]
is then displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
• With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display. To restore
the display, do any of the following.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Set
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shortcut button] or [Set
button] on the
- Press any button (other than the power button)
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
Other Shooting
Modes
- Raise or lower the flash
• You can still record movies in [ ], [E] or [ ] mode even if you assign a
function to the movie button.
2 Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
3 Use the assigned function as
needed.
zzTo activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
97
Cover
3 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown
on this menu will be available on the [4] tab of the menu screen.
Basic Guide
• The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the <m> button
when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
then add to the FUNC. menu again will be removed from My Menu.
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [4]
tab, and then press the <m> button
Rearranging Menu Items
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Access the setting screen.
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
press the < > button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <m> or <r> button to choose
an icon to move. Press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
the new position, and then press the
<m> or <q> button.
Playback Mode
2 Choose icons to include in the
menu.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial and then press the
<m> button to choose icons to include
in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are
marked with a [ ].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzSelected items (labeled with a [ ]) will be
included in display.
Index
zzItems without a [ ] will be available on
the [4] tab of the menu screen.
98
Cover
Still Images
3 Save the settings.
Before Use
Saving Shooting Settings
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the destination, and
then press the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings
for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [
or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting
]
Basic Guide
modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained
this way.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
• To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [
or [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Settings that can be saved
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
Shooting modes ([G], [M], [B], and [D])
Shooting menu settings
Other Shooting
Modes
• To clear information you have saved to [ ] or [ ] and restore default values,
P Mode
Zoom positions
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
1 Enter a shooting mode with
Wi-Fi Functions
settings you want to save, and
change the settings as desired.
Setting Menu
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
99
Cover
Still Images
Movies
3 Rearrange menu items, as
needed.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Sort], and then press
the <m> button.
zzChoose a menu item to move (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Before Use
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly from
Common Camera
Operations
]
Basic Guide
a single screen.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to change the order, and then
press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <n> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not
be available in some shooting modes.
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Select items], and
then press the <m> button.
zzChoose up to five menu items to save
(either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <7> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
Playback Mode
• To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the <n> button in
Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the <q><r> buttons to
choose [Yes].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zz[ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel saving, press the <m> button.
Index
[
] is no longer displayed.
zzPress the <n> button.
100
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
6
Basic Guide
Playback Mode
Advanced Guide
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to enter Playback mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from
other cameras.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Viewing Slideshows ............................................ 110
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shuffle).................................................... 110
Viewing............................................................ 102
Convenient Control Using the <
Button ............................................................ 118
>
Switching Display Modes ....................................103
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)................................104
Checking People Detected in Face ID ................105
Playback Mode
Editing Still Images........................................ 118
Protecting Images...........................................111
Wi-Fi Functions
Resizing Images.................................................. 118
Cropping.............................................................. 119
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)..........120
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)............120
Correcting Red-Eye.............................................121
Choosing a Selection Method ..............................111
Choosing Images Individually ............................. 112
Selecting a Range............................................... 112
Specifying All Images at Once ............................ 113
Browsing and Filtering Images..................... 105
Setting Menu
Navigating through Images in an Index...............105
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions ..106
Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or
Jump by [ ] or [ ] ...........................................107
Viewing Individual Images in a Group.................108
Accessories
9
10
Erasing Images............................................... 114
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ........................ 114
Rotating Images ............................................. 116
Deactivating Auto Rotation.................................. 116
Tagging Images as Favorites........................ 117
Editing Movies................................................ 122
Appendix
Reducing File Sizes ............................................123
Editing Digest Movies..........................................123
Editing Face ID Information .......................... 108
Index
Image Viewing Options.................................. 109
Magnifying Images..............................................109
101
Cover
Still Images
Movies
zzMovies are identified by a [
] icon. To
Before Use
Viewing
play movies, go to step 3.
Common Camera
Operations
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Basic Guide
1 Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the <1> button.
zzYour last shot is displayed.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 Play movies.
zzTo start playback, press the <m> button
to access the movie control panel,
choose [ ] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Browse through your images.
zzTo view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<7> dial clockwise.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
4 Adjust the volume.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to adjust the
volume.
Volume Indicator
Playback Mode
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browse through images quickly.
zzTo adjust the volume when the volume
indicator is no longer displayed, press the
<o><p> buttons.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
5 Pause playback.
zzTo pause or resume playback, press the
<m> button.
zzAfter the movie is finished, [
displayed.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
<7> dial to browse through images.
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
] is
Index
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the <o><p> buttons in
Scroll Display mode.
102
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
• To deactivate Scroll Display, press the <n> button, choose [Scroll
Display] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off].
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
• If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, press the <n> button, and on the [1] tab, choose [Resume] and
then [Last shot].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
• To change the transition shown between images, press the <n> button,
choose [Transition Effect] on the [1] tab, and then choose the desired effect.
Camera Basics
Histogram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
High
Low
Still Images
Movies
zzThe graph in detailed information display
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
Switching Display Modes
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Dark
Bright
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
zzThe histogram can also be accessed
Wi-Fi Functions
No Information
Display
Simple
Information
Display
Detailed
Information
Display
RGB Histogram,
GPS Information
Display
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
103
Cover
Movies
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
zzThe RGB histogram shows the
Basic Guide
of still image shooting as follows.
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Advanced Guide
1 Choose an image.
Camera Basics
zzChoose a still image labeled with [
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
and press the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzUsing a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
in the GPS information display.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Play the movie.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK].
Playback Mode
zzThe movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when you are using the
• [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on
your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
Appendix
Index
• UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean
Time
• GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information.
104
Cover
Browsing and Filtering Images
Before Use
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
Still Images
Movies
Common Camera
Operations
Navigating through Images in an Index
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
1 Choose a movie.
Basic Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [1] tab, and
you are looking for.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Play the movie.
1 Display images in an index.
zzMove the zoom lever toward <g> to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
zzPress the <m> button to start playback.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Checking People Detected in Face ID
displayed.
P Mode
zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward <k>. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2 Choose an image.
zzTurn the <7> dial to scroll through the
images.
zzPress the <p> button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose an image.
zzNames will be displayed on detected
people.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
9
10
Appendix
zzPress the <m> button to view the
selected image in single-image display.
Index
• If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the
<n> button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab, and then set [Name
Display] to [Off].
• To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial rapidly), press the <n> button, and on the
[1] tab, set [Index Effect] to [Off].
105
Cover
Still Images
Finding Images Matching Specified
Conditions
Movies
2 Choose the second condition
and check the images found.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose
another condition. Once you turn the
<7> dial, you can view the images
narrowed down by your conditions.
zzTo cancel this mode, press the <n>
button.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Favorites
Shot Date
People
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo switch to filtered image display, press
the <m> button and go to step 3.
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Displays images with detected faces.
3 View the filtered images.
zzImages matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view
only these images, press the <q><r>
buttons, or turn the <7> dial.
Other Shooting
Modes
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
Still image/Movie
Name
[
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzTo cancel filtered display, press the <
>
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
button.
Filtering Display by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [
]
Wi-Fi Functions
• When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
1 Choose the first condition for
image display or navigation.
zzIn single-image display, press the <
button, and then press the <o><p>
buttons to choose a display filter.
Setting Menu
>
• To show or hide information, press the <p> button in step 3.
them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <7> dial. To perform an
action for all of these images together,
press the <m> button and go to step 3.
Index
is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.
106
Cover
Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or
Jump by [ ] or [ ]
Still Images
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Filtering Display by [
]
Jump to Favorites
Jump Shot Date
1 Choose [ ].
Basic Guide
Jumps to the first image in each group of images that
were shot on the same date.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Filtering Display by
[
[
] and press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
Jump 10 Images
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose a person.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons
to choose a person, and then press the
<m> button.
1 Choose a condition.
zzChoose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the <z>
dial and then pressing the <o><p>
buttons.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 View the filtered images.
zzFollow step 3 in “Filtering Display by [ ],
Playback Mode
[
2 View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by
the specified amount.
zzTurn the <z> dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
images.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• Turning the <z> dial when browsing images in index display will jump to the
previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image
display. However, if you have chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be
switched to [ ].
Index
107
Cover
Still Images
Editing Face ID Information
Before Use
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or
Common Camera
Operations
G], [M],
erase it.
[
B
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Basic Guide
but they can also be viewed individually.
Advanced Guide
1 Choose a grouped image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image labeled
Changing Names
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button and choose
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and
then press the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
with [
], and then press the <m>
Other Shooting
Modes
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 View images in the group
individually.
zzPressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial will display only images in
the group.
zzPressing the < > button will display
[Display all images]. Press <m> to
cancel group playback.
2 Choose an image.
choose an image and press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
the name to change, and then press the
<m> button.
Accessories
9
10
• During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly
• To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images,
press the <n> button, choose [Group Images] on the [1] tab, and then
individual playback.
Appendix
Index
108
Cover
3 Choose the editing option.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [Overwrite],
and then press the <m> button.
Image Viewing Options
Before Use
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
Magnifying Images
Basic Guide
4 Choose the name of the person
to overwrite with.
zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
1 Magnify an image.
Advanced Guide
zzMoving the zoom lever toward <k> will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward <g>. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
Other Shooting
Modes
Erasing Names
zzFollowing step 3 in “Changing Names”
<m> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
P Mode
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
zzTo move the display position, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zzTo switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the <7> dial.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Approximate Position of
Displayed Area
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the
Accessories
<n> button.
• You can check the focus when [
9
10
] is displayed by pressing the <m>
Appendix
button to enlarge the AF frame position (Focus Check). Press the <m> button
repeatedly to enlarge any other AF frames displayed.
Index
109
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Before Use
Viewing Slideshows
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shuffle)
Common Camera
Operations
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
Basic Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Smart Shuffle] on the [1] tab, and then
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
zzFour candidate images are displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Start automatic playback.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Start], and then
press the <m> button.
zzThe slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
zzPress the <n> button to stop the
slideshow.
Playback Mode
2 Choose an image.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose the image you want to view next.
zzYour chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzFor full-screen display of the center
image, press the <m> button. To restore
the original display, press the <m>
button again.
Appendix
Index
during slideshows.
zzPress the <n> button to restore
single-image display.
• To pause or resume slideshows, press the <m> button.
• You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the
<q><r> buttons down.
110
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart
Shuffle.
Before Use
Protecting Images
Common Camera
Operations
• Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
Basic Guide
Choosing a Selection Method
Advanced Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button and choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Choose a selection method.
zzChoose a menu item and an option as
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the
Appendix
Index
• Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To
erase them this way, first cancel protection.
111
Cover
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
Before Use
1 Choose [Select].
1 Choose [Select Range].
Common Camera
Operations
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Range] and press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
2 Choose an image.
2 Choose a starting image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
zzPress the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Protect the image.
zzPress the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3 Choose an ending image.
zzPress the <r> button to choose [Last
image], and then press the <m> button.
Accessories
9
10
• Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn
the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
Appendix
Index
112
Cover
Specifying All Images at Once
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
zzImages before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
1 Choose [Select All Images].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Images] and press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 Protect the images.
Camera Basics
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Protect], and then
press the <m> button.
4 Protect the images.
zzPress the <p> button to choose
[Protect], and then press the <m>
button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of
“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• You can also choose the first or last image by turning the <7> dial when the
top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
113
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
Before Use
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing
images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Choosing a Selection Method
Advanced Guide
1 Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
1 Access the setting screen.
zzPress the <n> button, and then
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Erase the image.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <a> button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Choose a selection method.
zzChoose a menu item and an option as
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
zzThe current image is now erased.
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• Pressing the <a> button while [ ] images are displayed will give you
the option of choosing [Erase
], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase
+JPEG] for
Appendix
deletion.
Index
114
Cover
Before Use
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select].
1 Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Common Camera
Operations
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Range] and press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
2 Choose images.
2 Choose an image.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
zzOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Erase the images.
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <p> button to choose [Erase],
and then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Erase the image.
zzPress the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Specifying All Images at Once
Wi-Fi Functions
1 Choose [Select All Images].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Images] and press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
2 Erase the images.
Appendix
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Index
115
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Before Use
Rotating Images
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose
1 Choose [Rotate].
zzPress the <n> button and choose
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the
original orientation.
[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated
images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
2 Rotate the image.
P Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
zzThe image is rotated 90° each time you
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• Movies with an image quality of [
], [
], or [
] cannot
be rotated.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
116
Cover
Still Images
Movies
3 Finish the setup process.
zzPress the <n> button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Before Use
Tagging Images as Favorites
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all
of those images.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
•
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
• Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
Auto Mode /
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Choose [Favorites].
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <n> button and choose
• Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
) when transferred
to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not
apply to movies or RAW images.)
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo untag the image, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
Index
117
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Editing Still Images
Before Use
Convenient Control Using the < >
Button
Common Camera
Operations
card has sufficient free space.
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the <
>
Basic Guide
button.
Still Images
Advanced Guide
Resizing Images
1 Choose [Set Shortcut button].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Set Shortcut button] on the [1]
Camera Basics
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Choose [Resize].
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <n> button and choose
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a function to assign,
and then press the <m> button.
P Mode
2 Choose an image.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Use the assigned function as
needed.
zzPress the < > button to activate the
assigned function.
Playback Mode
3 Choose an image size.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the size, and then
press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• To restore default settings, choose [ ].
Accessories
9
10
• When [2] is assigned and you press the < > button while the camera is not
connected to the printer, the image is designated for printing and will be printed
once the printer is connected.
zz[Save new image?] is displayed.
Appendix
Index
4 Save the new image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.
118
Cover
Cropping Area
5 Review the new image.
zzPress the <n> button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
3 Adjust the cropping area.
zzA frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press
the <m> button.
zzThe original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped is shown in the lower right.
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzThe saved image is now displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
or saved as [ ] in step 3.
• RAW images cannot be edited.
zzTo move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zzTo change the frame orientation, press
the <m> button.
zzFaces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the <7> dial to switch to the
other frame.
Preview of Image After
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cropping
Resolution After Cropping
Other Shooting
Modes
• Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Still Images
Cropping
Playback Mode
zzPress the <n> button.
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
Wi-Fi Functions
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
1 Choose [Cropping].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
•
2 Choose an image.
Index
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
• RAW images cannot be edited.
• Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.
• Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images.
people left in the cropped image will remain.
119
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Common Camera
Operations
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [My Colors].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [1] tab
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [i-Contrast].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
P Mode
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Choose an option.
Playback Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an option.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Accessories
9
10
4 Save as a new image and
review.
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Appendix
Index
• Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired
color.
• For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
• Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
• Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
• RAW images cannot be edited this way.
• The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color
120
Cover
4 Save as a new image and
review.
• If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using
[Low], [Medium], or [High].
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.
zzFollow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
Still Images
Basic Guide
Correcting Red-Eye
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
Advanced Guide
corrected image as a separate file.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1]
• Some images may not be corrected accurately.
• To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
• Protected images cannot be overwritten.
• RAW images cannot be edited this way.
• Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ], but
the original image cannot be overwritten.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
2 Choose an image.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
Playback Mode
3 Correct the image.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <m> button.
zzRed-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
121
Cover
Movies
3 Review the edited movie.
Before Use
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
Editing Movies
[
], and then press the <m> button.
Common Camera
Operations
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.
The edited movie is now played.
zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
zzTo cancel editing, press the <o><p>
buttons to choose [ ]. Press the <m>
button, choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button again.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [*].
zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
<m> button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzThe movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Save the edited movie.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
Movie Editing Panel
[
], and then press the <m> button.
2 Specify portions to cut.
P Mode
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
[
] or [ ].
zzTo view the portions you can cut
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press
the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>
dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the
movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and
cut the end of the movie by choosing
Playback Mode
zzThe movie is now saved as a new file.
zzChoose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Movie Editing Bar
Accessories
[
].
zzIf you move [ ] to a position other than a
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
9
10
Appendix
[
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
Index
[
] mark on the right will be cut.
122
Cover
Movies
• To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
• If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
• Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
Before Use
Editing Digest Movies
Common Camera
Operations
needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or
1 Select the clip to erase.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the <m> button to access the
movie control panel.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Reducing File Sizes
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
zzChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2 Choose [ ].
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press
the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• Compressed movies are saved in [
• [ ] movies cannot be compressed.
] format.
zzThe selected clip is played back repeatedly.
Accessories
9
10
• Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose
[Overwrite].
• However, you can compress and save edited movies as new files by choosing
[Compress & Sav.].
3 Confirm erasure.
Appendix
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Index
zzThe clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
• [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a
printer.
123
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
7
Basic Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Advanced Guide
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera
with Web services
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Installing the Software.........................................131
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)...................................................133
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi ......................... 125
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi............ 126
Uploading Images to Web Services....................126
Sending Images to a Smartphone.......................126
Sending Images to Another Camera...................126
Sending Images to a Computer ..........................127
Printing Images Wirelessly..................................127
Registering Web Services............................. 127
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY .............128
Registering Other Web Services.........................130
Sending Images.............................................. 142
Sending Images Individually ...............................142
Sending Multiple Images.....................................143
Adding Comments...............................................143
Playback Mode
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu............................. 133
Wi-Fi Functions
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi..................................133
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection.........................134
Saving Images to a Computer....................... 144
Setting Menu
Sending Images Automatically
Connecting via an Access Point................... 134
(Image Sync) ................................................. 145
Initial Preparations ..............................................145
Sending Images ..................................................146
Accessories
Confirming Access Point Compatibility................134
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points..135
Connecting to Access Points in the List ..............138
9
10
Appendix
Geotagging Images on the Camera.............. 146
Connecting without an Access Point........... 139
Previous Access Points.......................................140
Connecting to Another Camera.................... 141
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone................................................... 130
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings ................. 147
Editing Connection Information...........................147
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default...............148
Index
Preparing to Register a Computer................ 131
Checking Your Computer Environment...............131
124
Cover
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Computer
Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to
a computer.
Before Use
This camera is an approved Wi-Fi®* product. You can wirelessly connect to
and send images to the following devices and services.
Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be
referred to as Wi-Fi.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Connecting to a Printer
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer
(supporting DPS over IP) to print them.
* Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of wireless
LAN devices.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connecting to Web Services
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Images can be sent to social network services and other Web
services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on
the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or
Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
* CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to
those who have purchased this product.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Connecting to a Smartphone
Playback Mode
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that
have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a
connected smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and
other compatible devices are collectively referred to as
“smartphones”.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Connecting to Another Camera
Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand,
compact digital cameras.
Index
125
Cover
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi
Before Use
Sending images via Wi-Fi requires some initial preparation on the camera
and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary
depending on the destination.
nickname on the camera.
Common Camera
Operations
Internet
CameraWindow
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera
Smartphone
Tablet computer
Access point
Camera Basics
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
SNS, video-
CANON iMAGE
sharing sites,
GATEWAY
e-mail
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Sending Images to Another Camera
Access point
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Camera
Computer or smartphone
Playback Mode
browsers
Camera
Camera
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
126
Cover
Sending Images to a Computer
Registering Web Services
Before Use
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you
want to use.
Common Camera
Operations
Internet
CameraWindow
•
•
•
•
•
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and
other Web services.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access point
Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
Camera
Computer
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the
websites for each Web service you want to register.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Printing Images Wirelessly
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera
Printer
Access point
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
127
Cover
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
4 Choose [ ].
Before Use
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
Common Camera
Operations
turn the <7> dial to choose [
then press the <m> button.
], and
Basic Guide
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY and access the
camera settings page.
zzFrom a computer or smartphone, access
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your
region.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Establish a connection with the
access point.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Authenticate], and
then press the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzAccess the camera settings page.
zzOnce the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
6 Choose an access point.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Choose your camera model.
Setting Menu
zzOn this camera model, [
] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
Accessories
9
10
zzOnce you choose the model, a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 9, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 8.
Appendix
Index
3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzOn the camera, access the Wi-Fi menu
128
Cover
7 Enter the access point
password.
zzPress the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
10 Check the confirmation
numbers and complete the
setup process.
zzMake sure the confirmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 Choose [Auto] and establish the
connection.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzComplete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
GATEWAY are now added as
zzOnce the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
Playback Mode
destinations, and the [
to [ ].
] icon changes
Wi-Fi Functions
zzA message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is finished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
9 Enter the authentication code.
zzOn the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
zzA six-digit confirmation number is
displayed.
Index
• You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS
Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 6 – 8 in “Connecting to WPS-
129
Cover
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free
dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.
Basic Guide
1 Access the Web service
settings screen.
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
Advanced Guide
1 Connect the smartphone to a
network.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Install CameraWindow.
zzFor an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch,
download and install CameraWindow
from the App Store.
2 Configure the Web service you
want to use.
zzFollow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzFor an Android device, download and
install CameraWindow from Google Play.
zzAfter installation, use the camera
to establish a connection with the
Playback Mode
3 Choose [ ].
Wi-Fi Functions
[
] (either press the <o><p><q><r>
Setting Menu
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
• For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions),
refer to the Canon website.
Accessories
9
10
zzThe Web service settings are now
updated.
Appendix
Index
• If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the
camera settings.
130
Cover
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
Preparing to Register a Computer
Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly,
you must install CameraWindow.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
What you will need:
zzComputer
zzUSB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
Basic Guide
Checking Your Computer Environment
Advanced Guide
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Download the software.
zzWith a computer connected to the
Windows
Macintosh
Mac OS X 10.6.8
Mac OS X 10.7
Other Shooting
Modes
Operating
System
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
P Mode
Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
zzAccess the site for your country or region.
zzDownload the software.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
• Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
2 Begin the installation.
zzClick [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
131
Cover
4 Install the files.
3 When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the
camera, choose whether to
connect or not.
Before Use
zzInstallation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
When Connecting the Camera to
the Computer
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal ( ).
zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
Advanced Guide
zzAfter installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the
cable.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new
functions via the Internet (some software excluded).
• The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed,
so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.
• Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera
model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to
its latest version of the software.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
zzTurn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Without Connecting the Camera
zzSelect [Install without connecting
the device] and follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
Index
132
Cover
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu
Before Use
Connection (Windows Only)
Common Camera
Operations
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi
To start with, register a camera nickname.
Basic Guide
This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when
connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.
1 Confirm that the computer is
connected to the access point.
zzFor instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Configure the setting.
zzPress the < > button.
zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu
P Mode
►
►
►
[All Programs]
[Canon Utilities]
2 Enter a nickname.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
►
[CameraWindow]
setup].
[Wi-Fi connection
zzPress the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter a nickname
Playback Mode
zzIn the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
zzUp to 16 characters can be used.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in
step 2.
Accessories
9
10
- Turn on media streaming.
zzThe Wi-Fi menu is displayed.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
Appendix
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
Index
This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.
• Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as
described here. Check the settings of your security software.
133
Cover
Connecting via an Access Point
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
• When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory
card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must
contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a
smartphone or printer wirelessly.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
• To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and
then choose [Change Device Nickname].
• Nicknames beginning with a space cannot be entered in step 2. If you attempt
to do this and press the <n> button on the keyboard screen, a message
will be displayed. Press the <m> button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Basic Guide
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Advanced Guide
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items. For instructions
on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection
• If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings,
contact the system administrator for details.
• These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Other Shooting
Modes
•
•
Once you have connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will
P Mode
be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <
>
button. You can easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons
to choose the device name and then pressing the <m> button.
To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
<q><r> buttons, and then configure the setting.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• If you prefer not to display recent target devices, press the <n> button,
and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
134
Cover
Check sheet
Before Use
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method
for settings on a WPS supported device.
Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.
Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
○ None
○ WEP (open system
authentication)
○ WPA-PSK (TKIP)
Advanced Guide
Network authentication / data encryption (encryption
method / encryption mode)
1 Confirm that the target device is
connected to the access point.
zzThis step is not required when connecting
to Web services.
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. ○ WPA-PSK (AES)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
○ WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
○ WPA2-PSK (AES)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless
transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network
key”.
zzFor instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Key index (transmit key)
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / ○ 1
data encryption.
Playback Mode
3 Choose the target device.
zzChoose the target device (either press
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with
your access point to check if it supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting
multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a
“Wi-Fi router”.
• This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.
• If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the
camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s
MAC address by choosing the [3] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC
Address].
zzTo connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].
zzTo connect to a computer, choose [ ].
zzTo connect to a printer, choose [2].
zzTo connect to a Web service, choose
the service icon. If multiple recipients
or sharing options are used with a Web
service, choose the desired item on the
[Select Recipient] screen (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
135
Cover
4 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
8 Establish the connection.
zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
zzOn the camera, press the <m> button.
zzThe camera will connect to the access
point.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzIf you have selected [ ], [2], or [ ] in
step 3, devices connected to the access
point are listed on the [Select a Device]
screen displayed next.
5 To connect to a smartphone or
printer:
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Switch Network].
zzWhen the [Waiting to connect] screen
Network] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
zzIf you have selected a Web service in
step 3, go to step 11.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
9 To connect to a smartphone,
printer, or computer:
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Choose the target device.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the computer name,
and then press the <m> button.
zzIf you have selected a smartphone,
printer, or Macintosh computer, go to
step 11.
6 Choose [WPS Connection].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [WPS Connection],
and then press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
7 Choose [PBC Method].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [PBC Method], and
then press the <m> button.
Index
136
Cover
11 Send or print the images.
zzThe screen displayed when the devices
are connected varies depending on the
target device.
10 If you have selected a computer
running Windows in step 9 for
the first time:
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Install a driver.
Basic Guide
zzWhen the screen at left is displayed on
the camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
zzWhen the camera is connected to a
smartphone or Web service, an image
transfer screen is displayed. For
instructions on sending images, see
zzWhen the camera is connected to a
computer, the camera screen is blank.
the computer.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzDouble-click the connected camera icon.
zzDriver installation will begin.
zzAfter driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzWhen the camera is connected to a
printer, you can print by following the
same steps as for printing via USB. For
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• If you chose [PIN Method] in step 7, a PIN code will be displayed on the
screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included
with your access point.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• To add multiple destinations, repeat this procedure from the first step.
Appendix
Index
137
Cover
3 Enter the access point
password.
zzPress the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
Before Use
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following
•
Common Camera
Operations
To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already
connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Note that this
step is not required when connecting to Web services.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
•
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure from step 6.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Choose [Auto].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Connecting to Access Points in the List
zzIf you selected [ ], [2], or [ ] as the
target device, see “Connecting to WPS-
Compatible Access Points”, starting with
zzIf you selected a Web service as the
destination, see “Connecting to WPS-
Compatible Access Points”, starting with
P Mode
1 View the listed access points.
zzView the listed networks (access
points) as described in steps 1 – 5 of
“Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Choose an access point.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
• To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or
refer to the user manual.
9
10
Appendix
• Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected,
choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow on-
screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
• When you use an access point that you have already connected to for
connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To
use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <7> dial) and press the <m> button.
Index
138
Cover
Connecting without an Access Point
When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the
camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using
another access point.
Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections
4 On the target device, connect
to the network identified on the
camera.
zzIn the smartphone or printer’s Wi-Fi
setting menu, choose the SSID (network
name) displayed on the camera.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5 For a smartphone connection:
Start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
zzThe first time CameraWindow starts
up, register a smartphone nickname for
display on the camera.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose the target device.
zzChoose the target device (either press
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzOnce the smartphone is recognized on
the camera, the device connection screen
will be displayed on the camera.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzTo connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].
zzTo connect to a printer, choose [2].
6 Choose the target device.
zzChoose the target device name (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzThe camera’s SSID is displayed.
Index
139
Cover
7 For a smartphone connection:
Adjust the privacy setting.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press
the <m> button.
• To add multiple devices, repeat this procedure from the first step.
• For better security, you can require password input on the screen in step 3
by accessing MENU and choosing [3] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password]
► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the device in step 4, enter the
password displayed on the camera.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzYou can now use the smartphone to
receive images sent from the camera,
or to geotag images on the camera
Advanced Guide
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following
To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Set
Camera As Access Point].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
8 Send or print the images.
zzThe screen displayed when the devices
are connected varies depending on the
target device.
Other Shooting
Modes
•
•
When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target
device to the access point in step 4.
P Mode
zzWhen the camera is connected to a
smartphone, an image transfer screen
is displayed. For instructions on sending
zzWhen the camera is connected to a
printer, you can print by following the
same steps as for printing via USB. For
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step 6
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone,
choose [No] in step 7.
Appendix
Index
• To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list,
choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from
[Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings].
140
Cover
Connecting to Another Camera
zzWhen the target camera has been added
successfully, the image transfer screen
will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending
Before Use
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
• Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected
to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot
be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to
PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS
cameras with this camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
• To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.
• Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in
step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from
the list.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose camera.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [4], and
then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
zzCamera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
141
Cover
Sending Images
Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.
Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this
may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is
enough space for it on the memory card.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.
• Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long
time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.
• When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality
varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user
manual.
• To disconnect from the camera, press the <n> button, choose [OK] on
the confirmation screen (either press the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button. You can also use the smartphone to
end the connection.
Sending Images Individually
Advanced Guide
1 Choose an image.
zzTurn the <7> dial to choose an image
to send.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Send the image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the
<m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons.
zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the <m> button.
zzImage transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
zzAfter images are uploaded to a Web
service, [OK] is displayed. Press the
<m> button to return to the playback
screen.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
Playback Mode
• Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images
you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Wi-Fi Functions
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p>
buttons, and then press the <m> button. On the next screen, choose the
resolution by pressing the <o><p> buttons, and then press the <m>
button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzAfter sending images to a camera or
smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be
displayed, and the display will return to
the image transfer screen.
•
•
To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
Index
Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected
size before sending.
• Movies cannot be resized.
142
Cover
Sending Multiple Images
• Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent.
• Movies up to five minutes (or digest movies up to 13 minutes) can be sent.
• Web services may limit the number of images you can send. For details, refer
to the Web service you are using.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
1 Choose [Select and send].
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the
<m> button.
• You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward
<k> to access single-image display and then pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <7> dial.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.
2 Choose images.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image to send, and then press
the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
1 Access the screen for adding
comments.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose [ ], and then press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
the <n> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3 Send the images.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Send], and then
press the <m> button.
Accessories
9
10
3 Send the image.
Appendix
Index
• When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is automatically sent.
143
Cover
Saving Images to a Computer
When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the
camera.
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
• Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images.
• To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
• You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the
computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
Advanced Guide
• If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
1 Display CameraWindow.
zzIn Windows, access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
zzOn a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
P Mode
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
saved.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
Playback Mode
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
file sizes.
2 Import images.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Appendix
Index
144
Cover
3 Choose the type of images
to send (only when sending
movies with images).
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be
sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the
<q><r> buttons to choose [Stills/
Movies].
Advanced Guide
Initial Preparations
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• To choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering
Other Shooting
Modes
1 Install the software.
zzInstall the software on a computer
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
2 Register the camera.
zzWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
Playback Mode
zzMacintosh: In the menu bar, click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
Wi-Fi Functions
zzChoose a source camera from one of
the cameras listed, which are linked to
zzOnce the camera is registered and ready
to receive images, the icon changes to
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
[
].
Index
145
Cover
Sending Images
Geotagging Images on the Camera
Before Use
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored
images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and
save the images.
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
• Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time
destinations that are in other time zones.
• The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to
• Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Advanced Guide
choose [ ].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOnce the connection is established, the
images are sent.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzWhen the images have been sent
successfully to the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on
the screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzImages are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
zzImages are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
• When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack
Appendix
Index
• Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any
images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to
the computer.
• Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as
the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet.
146
Cover
5 Choose an item to edit.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an item to edit, and
then press the <m> button.
zzThe items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Before Use
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Editing Connection Information
Basic Guide
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
Advanced Guide
Connection
Web
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose a device to edit.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial to choose the icon
of the device to edit, and then press the
<m> button.
Configurable Items
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
4
c
Services
Other Shooting
Modes
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
P Mode
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
–
O
: Configurable : Not configurable
3 Choose [Edit a Device].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
Playback Mode
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection
Device Nickname] and press the <m>
button.
9
10
4 Choose a device to edit.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the device to edit,
and then press the <m> button.
Appendix
Index
zzSelect the input field and press the <m>
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
147
Cover
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera
to another person, or dispose of it.
Before Use
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection
Connection Info] and press the <m>
button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Reset Settings], and
then press the <m> button.
P Mode
zzThe connection information will be
erased.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Restore the default settings.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
Index
• Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure
that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
• To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the
148
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
8
Basic Guide
Setting Menu
Advanced Guide
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Using Eco Mode..................................................152
Power-Saving Adjustment...................................152
Screen Brightness...............................................153
Start-Up Screen ..................................................153
Formatting Memory Cards ..................................153
File Numbering....................................................154
Date-Based Image Storage.................................155
Metric / Non-Metric Display.................................155
Electronic Level Calibration.................................155
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions.............. 150
Silencing Camera Operations .............................150
Adjusting the Volume ..........................................150
Customizing Sounds ...........................................150
Hiding Hints and Tips ..........................................151
Date and Time.....................................................151
World Clock.........................................................151
Lens Retraction Timing .......................................152
Playback Mode
Images ................................................................156
Checking Certification Logos ..............................156
Display Language ...............................................157
Adjusting Other Settings .....................................157
Restoring Defaults...............................................157
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
149
Cover
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Before Use
Functions can be configured on the [3] tab. Customize commonly used
Common Camera
Operations
zzChoose [Volume], and then press the
<m> button.
Basic Guide
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
zzChoose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust the volume.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzChoose [Mute], and then choose [On].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzChoose [Sound Options], and then press
the <m> button.
zzChoose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to choose an option.
• Operation can also be silenced by holding down the <p> button as you turn
the camera on.
restore sound during movies, press the <o> button. Adjust volume with the
<o><p> buttons, as needed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
be changed.
Index
150
Cover
Hiding Hints and Tips
World Clock
Before Use
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you
travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that
time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/
Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzChoose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Specify your destination.
zzChoose [Time Zone], and then press the
<m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ World], and then
press the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the destination.
zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [ ].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
zzChoose [Date/Time], and then press the
<m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the <o><p> buttons or
turning the <7> dial.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <m> button.
Setting Menu
2 Switch to the destination time
zone.
Accessories
9
10
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [ World], and then
press the <n> button.
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
Appendix
Index
update your [
Home] time and date.
151
Cover
2 Shoot.
Lens Retraction Timing
Before Use
zzTo activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
immediately after you press the <1> button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power
zzChoose [Lens Retract], and then choose
[0 sec.].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzChoose [Power Saving], and then press
the <m> button.
zzAfter choosing an item, press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust it as needed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When
the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery
consumption.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
• To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
Setting Menu
1 Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
• The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].
• These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode
Accessories
9
10
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting
Appendix
Index
zzThe screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
152
Cover
Screen Brightness
Formatting Memory Cards
Before Use
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Common Camera
Operations
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
zzChoose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to adjust the
brightness.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Access the [Format] screen.
zzChoose [Format], and then press the
<m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose [OK].
Other Shooting
Modes
• For maximum brightness, press and hold the <p> button for at least one
second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display.
(This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To restore
the original brightness, press and hold the <p> button again for at least one
second or restart the camera.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Start-Up Screen
3 Format the memory card.
zzTo begin the formatting process, press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
<m> button.
zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzChoose [Start-up Image], and then press
the <m> button.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
9
10
Appendix
Index
• Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
153
Cover
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
• The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than
the advertised capacity.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Low-Level Formatting
Basic Guide
Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is
slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.
Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level
formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other
steps to back them up.
zzChoose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Formatting
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial
to choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/
saved) even if you switch memory cards.
P Mode
Continuous
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or
when a new folder is created.
Auto Reset
Playback Mode
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
formatting process.
• Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered
consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted
memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted
folder structure and image formats.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.
• You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this
case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
154
Cover
Date-Based Image Storage
Electronic Level Calibration
Before Use
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
zzChoose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
1 Make sure the camera is level.
zzPlace the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
Advanced Guide
zzImages will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Calibrate the electronic level.
zzChoose [Electronic Level], and then press
the <m> button.
zzTo adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the <m> button.
A confirmation message is displayed.
zzChoose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Metric / Non-Metric Display
from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzChoose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzChoose [Electronic Level], and then press
the <m> button.
zzChoose [Reset], and then press the
<m> button.
Index
zzOnce the electronic level has been reset,
the menu screen is displayed again.
155
Cover
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
Before Use
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Info].
zzChoose [Copyright Info], and then press
the <m> button.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [Enter Author’s
Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press
the <m> button to access the keyboard,
zzPress the <n> button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Checking Certification Logos
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed
on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the
camera packaging, or on the camera body.
Playback Mode
zzThe information set here will now be
recorded in images.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the
screen above, and then press the <m> button.
information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the
camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
zzChoose [Certification Logo Display], and
then press the <m> button.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
• You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software,
once you save the images to a computer.
156
Cover
Display Language
Restoring Defaults
Before Use
Change the display language as needed.
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Common Camera
Operations
zzChoose [Language ], and then press
the <m> button.
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
zzChoose [Reset All], and then press the
<m> button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Restore default settings.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
• You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and
holding the <m> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
zzDefault settings are now restored.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab.
• The following functions are not restored to default settings.
Playback Mode
]
•
•
•
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
157
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
9
Basic Guide
Accessories
Advanced Guide
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible
accessories sold separately
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately)...........166
Using a Lens Hood..............................................167
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)...................167
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)..........168
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) .........169
System Map .................................................... 159
Optional Accessories..................................... 160
Power Supplies ...................................................160
Flash Units ..........................................................161
Other Accessories...............................................162
Printers................................................................162
Using Optional Accessories.......................... 163
Playback on a TV................................................163
Powering the Camera with Household Power.....165
Printing Images .............................................. 176
Easy Print............................................................176
Configuring Print Settings ...................................177
Printing Movie Scenes ........................................179
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)..............180
Adding Images to a Photobook...........................182
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Using the Software......................................... 173
Setting Menu
Software..............................................................173
Computer Connections via a Cable ....................174
Saving Images to a Computer.............................174
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
158
Cover
System Map
Before Use
Flash Units
Included Accessories
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Battery Pack
NB-10L*1
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
Speedlite*4
600EX-RT, 600EX,
580EX II, 430EX II,
320EX, 270EX II
Neck Strap
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*1
High-Power
Flash
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX*5*6
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX*6
Advanced Guide
HF-DC2*3
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cases
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Soft Case
SC-DC85
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2
Waterproof Case
WP-DC52
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Lens Accessories
Power
Memory Card
Card Reader
Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
Playback Mode
Tele-Converter
TC-DC58E*6
Canon-Brand Lens Filter
(58 mm dia.)*7
Wi-Fi Functions
Cables
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC80
Setting Menu
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Accessories
9
10
TV/Video
System
Appendix
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Other Accessories
Index
Remote Switch RS-60E3
159
Cover
*1Also available for purchase separately.
*2A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3High-Power Flash HF-DC1 also supported.
*4These accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera
Shoe Cord OC-E3.
*5Requires Bracket BKT-DC1 and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
*6Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L.
*7Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC58D.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Power Supplies
Advanced Guide
Battery Pack NB-10L
zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine
Canon accessories.
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-10L
Other Shooting
Modes
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire,
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage
and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
P Mode
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
zzFor powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
• For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available
adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed
for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
160
Cover
Flash Units
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX
zzExternal macro flash unit that enables
many styles of macro flash photography.
Requires Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord
OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold
separately) for attachment to the camera.
Requires Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58L (sold separately) for
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
zzExternal flash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in flash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Speedlite 600EX-RT, 600EX,
580EX II, 430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II
zzShoe-mounted flash unit that enables
many styles of flash photography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
attachment to the camera.
Other Shooting
Modes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
zzUsed to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to
the camera.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
zzPrevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Playback Mode
Bracket BKT-DC1
zzUsed to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to
the camera.
Wi-Fi Functions
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2
zzEnables wireless control of slave
Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
161
Cover
Other Accessories
Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58L
zzAdapter required to attach the Tele-
converter or Macro Ring Lite/Macro Twin
Lite flash to the camera.
Before Use
Soft Case SC-DC85
zzProtects the camera from dust and
scratches.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Handle with care to prevent leather
discoloration.
Advanced Guide
Remote Switch RS-60E3
zzEnables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Waterproof Case WP-DC52
zzFor underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Filter Adapter FA-DC58D
zzAdapter required when mounting a 58
mm filter.
P Mode
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
zzFor connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Canon Lens Filter (58 mm dia.)
zzProtects the lens and enables a variety of
shooting effects.
Playback Mode
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
zzConnect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
Wi-Fi Functions
Printers
Setting Menu
Canon-Brand PictBridge-
Compatible Printers
zzPrinting images without a computer is
possible by connecting the camera to
a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printer.
Accessories
9
10
HDMI Cable HTC-100
zzFor connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-definition TV.
Appendix
Index
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Tele-Converter TC-DC58E
zzOptional lens attached to the camera to
increase the focal length by a factor of
approximately 1.4x.
162
Cover
Still Images
Movies
Movies
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Before Use
Using Optional Accessories
Common Camera
Operations
Still Images
Basic Guide
Playback on a TV
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
video input.
zzSwitch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Movies
P Mode
4 Turn the camera on.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback on a High-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.
Movies shot at a resolution of [
in high definition.
Playback Mode
zzImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
], [
], or [
] can be viewed
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
1 Make sure the camera and TV
are off.
Accessories
9
10
• Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Appendix
HDTV.
Index
163
Cover
4 Control the camera with the TV
remote.
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
zzPress the <q><r> buttons on the remote
Common Camera
Operations
Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote
to browse images.
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.
Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For
details, refer to the TV manual.
zzTo display the camera control panel,
press the OK/Select button. Select
control panel options by pressing the
<q><r> buttons to choose an option,
and then pressing the OK/Select button
again.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Configure the setting.
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [3] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a
the camera to the TV.
Return
Closes the menu.
P Mode
Displays sets of images, either from continuous shooting
image is selected.)
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Group Playback
Playback Mode
[
3 Display images.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTurn on the TV. On the camera, press the
<1> button.
Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie
is selected.)
Play Movie
Slideshow
Setting Menu
zzImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during
playback, press the <q><r> buttons on the remote
control.
.
Accessories
9
10
Index Playback
Change Display
Displays multiple images in an index.
Appendix
l
Index
• Pressing buttons, such as the <n> button, on the camera will switch
control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to
single-image display.
• The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an
HDMI CEC-compatible TV.
164
Cover
Still Images
Movies
• Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the <n> button and choose [Video
System] on the [3] tab.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV as you control the camera.
Basic Guide
• When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing
shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when
available.
Advanced Guide
1 Make sure the camera and TV
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
are off.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
White
Red
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
Yellow
Yellow
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
Movies
the video inputs as shown.
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
P Mode
Red
White
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Playback Mode
1 Make sure the camera is off.
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Connect the adapter to the
coupler.
Setting Menu
zzInsert the adapter plug fully into the
coupler.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
3 Insert the coupler.
Index
3 Display images.
zzFollow step 2 in “Inserting the Battery
open the cover, and then insert the
coupler as shown until it locks into place.
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
images.
165
Cover
Still Images
Movies
zzLower the cover ( ), keeping the coupler
cable in the coupler cable port ( ).
zzSlide the cover ( ) until it clicks into
place.
Before Use
Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately)
Attaching Tele-converter TC-DC58E and Conversion Lens Adapter
Common Camera
Operations
LA-DC58L (both sold separately) enables you to use a focal length of 1.4x.
Basic Guide
1 Remove the ring.
Advanced Guide
zzMake sure the camera is off.
Camera Basics
zzHold down the ring release button (
and turn the ring in the direction of the
arrow ( ).
)
Coupler Cable Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Connect the power cord.
zzInsert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
Other Shooting
Modes
○
●
zzAlign the mark on the ring with the
mark on the camera, and then lift the
ring off.
P Mode
zzTurn the camera on and use it as desired.
zzWhen finished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2 Attach the conversion lens
Wi-Fi Functions
• Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
• Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so
could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
adapter.
Setting Menu
○
zzAlign the mark on the conversion lens
●
adapter with the mark on the camera,
Accessories
9
10
and then turn the adapter in the direction
of the arrows until it locks.
Appendix
zzTo remove the adapter, hold down the
ring release button and turn the adapter
in the opposite direction.
Index
166
Cover
Still Images
Movies
3 Attach the tele-converter lens.
zzTurn the lens in the direction of the arrow
to attach it securely to the camera.
Before Use
Using a Lens Hood
Common Camera
Operations
Attaching the lens hood included with Tele-converter TC-DC58E (sold
separately) can reduce the effect of extraneous light outside the angle of
view when shooting backlit subjects, or when the camera is aimed toward a
bright light source.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFit the lens hood over the tele-converter
as shown and attach it securely.
zzWhen the lens hood will not be used,
attach it inverted.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Specify the converter in the
camera settings.
zzTurn the camera on.
zzPress the <n> button and choose
[Converter] on the [4] tab. Press the
<q><r> buttons to choose [TC-DC58E].
zzThere is no need to adjust the converter
setting when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
zzAfter removing the converter, always
return the converter setting to [None].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens hood
Playback Mode
is attached.
Wi-Fi Functions
Still Images
Movies
Setting Menu
• Vignetting may occur (especially in the lower right) when the built-in
flash is used.
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Attaching a lens filter to the camera protects the lens and allows you to
shoot with various effects. To attach a lens filter, you will need Filter Adapter
FA-DC58D (sold separately).
Accessories
• Set the camera to maximum telephoto when using the tele-
converter. At other zoom positions, vignetting may occur.
• Use the LCD monitor to compose shots. The view through the
viewfinder may be partially obstructed by vignetting.
• Before use, remove all dust or debris from the conversion lens with
a lens blower brush.
9
10
Appendix
Index
1 Remove the ring.
the ring.
167
Cover
Still Images
2 Attach the filter adapter.
Before Use
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
○
zzAlign the mark on the filter adapter with
Common Camera
Operations
●
the mark on the camera, and then turn
the adapter in the direction of the arrows
until it locks in place.
Basic Guide
zzTo remove the adapter, turn off the
camera, hold down the ring release
button, and turn the adapter in the
opposite direction.
Advanced Guide
1 Connect the remote switch.
zzMake sure the camera is off.
zzOpen the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Attach a filter.
zzAttach the filter to the camera in the
direction of the arrow.
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• We recommend the use of genuine Canon filters (58 mm dia.).
• When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
[Safety MF] to [On].
• If you use the built-in flash with the filter adapter attached, portions
of the image may appear darker.
• When using the filter adapter, be sure to use only one filter at a time.
Attaching multiple filters, or accessories such as a heavy lens, may
cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.
• Do not grip the filter adapter tightly.
Playback Mode
2 Shoot.
zzTo shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
• Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.
9
10
Appendix
• Remove the filter adapter when not using a filter.
Index
• The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the
same time.
168
Cover
Still Images
Movies
3 Choose shooting mode [G],
[M], [B], or [D].
zzFlash settings can only be configured in
these modes. In other modes, the flash
is adjusted and fired automatically, as
needed.
Before Use
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional Speedlite
EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the optional
Speedlite 320EX flash is available.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series functions.
• Wireless operation of the Speedlite 600EX-RT is not supported.
• Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not
fire at all, in some cases.
• Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units) or
flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and may
damage the camera.
4 Set the white balance to [h]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Configure the external flash.
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button.
zzOptions already set on the flash itself are
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
• Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional information.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then adjust the setting by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
zzAvailable items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the flash attached
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
Speedlite EX Series
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
flash photography needs.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
1 Attach the flash.
• Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a Speedlite EX series
flash is attached, because that setting screen is no longer accessible.
• You can also access the setting screen by pressing the <r> button for at least
one second.
• Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be configured just as they are in [G]
mode.
• 600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the external flash
has been set up for stroboscopic flash.
• 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie recording or
in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.
zzMake sure the camera is off, and then
attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.
Appendix
Index
2 Turn the flash on, and then turn
the camera on.
zzA red [h] icon is now displayed.
zzThe flash pilot lamp will light up when the
flash is ready.
169
Cover
2 Remove the ring.
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
zzMake sure the camera is off.
zzHold down the ring release button (
Common Camera
Operations
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
)
and turn the ring in the direction of the
arrow ( ).
zzUsing the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-
E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows
next to subjects during vertical shooting.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
zzAlign the
○
mark on the ring with the
mark on the camera, and then lift the
ring off.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Other Shooting
Modes
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX
3 Attach the back section of the
This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.
Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (sold separately) for
attachment to the camera.
P Mode
conversion lens adapter.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
○
zzAlign the mark on the back section with
●
the mark on the camera, and then turn
Back
Front
Playback Mode
the adapter in the direction of the arrows
until it locks in place.
Section Section
1 Prepare the conversion lens
adapter.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo remove the adapter, hold down the
ring release button and turn the adapter
in the opposite direction.
zzRotate the conversion lens adapter in
the direction indicated by the arrow to
separate the front and back sections.
zzOnly the back section is used to attach
the Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX or Macro
Twin Lite MT-24EX.
Attach
Setting Menu
Accessories
Detach
9
10
4 Attach the controller to the
camera.
zzAttach the control component of the
macro ring lite to the hot shoe on top of
the camera.
Appendix
Attach to camera
Index
170
Cover
5 Attach the flash unit to the
conversion lens adapter.
zzPress the release buttons on both sides
of the macro ring lite in and attach the
macro ring lite to the conversion lens
adapter.
Before Use
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.
Requires the Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord
OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the
camera.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6 Choose shooting mode [G],
[M], [B], or [D].
1 Remove the ring and attach the
back section of the conversion
lens adapter.
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 in “Macro Ring Lite
and then attach the back section of the
conversion lens adapter.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzFlash settings can only be configured in
these modes. In other modes, the flash
is adjusted and fired automatically, as
needed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
7 Set the white balance to [h]
2 Attach the off-camera shoe cord
to the bracket.
zzSlide the bracket screw to the outer end
of the bracket. Align the bracket screw
with the tripod socket of the off-camera
shoe cord, and then tighten the screw to
secure it.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
10 Configure the external flash.
zzFollow step 5 in “Speedlite EX Series”
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3 Attach the bracket to the
camera.
zzSlide the other bracket screw to the outer
end of the bracket. Align the bracket
screw with the tripod socket on the
bottom of the camera, and then tighten
the screw to secure it.
Accessories
9
10
• Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or the off-camera shoe cord)
away from flash heads.
• When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the
flash heads from coming into contact with the legs.
• Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot
be used with these accessories attached.
Appendix
Index
171
Cover
4 Attach the off-camera shoe cord
to the camera.
zzAttach the camera connection component
of the off-camera shoe cord to the hot
shoe on top of the camera.
• Keep cords (from the macro twin lite or the off-camera shoe cord)
away from flash heads.
• When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the
flash heads from coming into contact with the legs or bracket.
• Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot
be used with these accessories attached.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
5 Attach the controller to the off-
camera shoe cord.
zzAttach the controller for the macro twin
lite to the flash connection component of
the off-camera shoe cord.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(Sold Separately)
Other Shooting
Modes
The following items are available in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can be
configured. (With autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However, external
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
6 Attach the flash unit to the
conversion lens adapter.
zzAttach each flash head to the respective
mount ( ). Press the release button on
the top of the ring in and attach the ring to
the conversion lens adapter ( ).
Shooting Mode
Item
Options
G M B D
Playback Mode
Auto*1
Manual*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Flash Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Flash Exp. Comp*3
Flash Output*4
Shutter Sync.
–3 to +3
Setting Menu
1/128*5 to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop increments)
O
O
O
–
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed
Accessories
9
10
On
Slow Synchro
Appendix
Off
Wireless Func.*6
Red-Eye Corr.
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Index
7 Configure the external flash and
settings on the camera.
zzFollow steps 6 – 10 in “Macro Ring Lite
settings.
Safety FE*7
Off
O
O
Clear Flash Settings*8
172
Cover
*1E-TTL mode is used for the flash.
*2M mode is used for the flash.
In [D] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case, when
the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to the flash
output level set on the camera.
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
*3Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure
compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure compensation
on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the camera display will be
updated accordingly.
*4Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the flash
unit.
*51/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX, and Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX.
*6For options other than On/Off, configure the setting on the flash unit itself. Not
available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX,
or Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX. When this item is set to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot
be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it will be changed to
[1st-curtain].)
Basic Guide
Software
Advanced Guide
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you
can do the following things on your computer.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
CameraWindow
zzImport images and change camera settings
ImageBrowser EX
zzManage images: view, search, and organize
zzPrint and edit images
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
*7Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro], [Safety
FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the [3] tab on the
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Digital Photo Professional
zzBrowse, process and edit RAW images
Playback Mode
• Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be configured just as they are in [G]
mode.
• Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
Wi-Fi Functions
• In [
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
Setting Menu
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting scenes determined by
the camera are not displayed, and the camera does not shoot continuously
Software Instruction Manual
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
173
Cover
Computer Connections via a Cable
Saving Images to a Computer
Before Use
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
Common Camera
Operations
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system
requirements and compatibility information, including support in new
operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Basic Guide
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal ( ).
Advanced Guide
Windows
Macintosh
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Windows Vista SP2
Windows XP SP3
Operating
System*
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
*
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including
supported OS versions.
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
Playback Mode
Installing the Software
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzOn a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is displayed when a
connection is established between the
camera and computer.
Index
174
Cover
zzFor Windows, follow the steps introduced
below.
Before Use
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
• To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images
From Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on
in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose
Common Camera
Operations
zzIn the screen that displays, click the [
]
link to modify the program.
Basic Guide
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
►
►
►
[All Programs]
[Canon Utilities]
[CameraWindow]
[CameraWindow].
Advanced Guide
• On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click
the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzDouble-click [
].
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
P Mode
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
saved.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
Playback Mode
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
file sizes.
CameraWindow
3 Save the images to the
computer.
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Wi-Fi Functions
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzAfter images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the <1> button
to turn the camera off, and unplug the
cable.
Index
zzFor instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
175
Cover
Still Images
Movies
3 Turn the printer on.
Before Use
Printing Images
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders
for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for
photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
4 Turn the camera on.
Common Camera
Operations
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
5 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
6 Access the printing screen.
Still Images
zzPress the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
Easy Print
7 Print the image.
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
P Mode
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Print], and then
press the <m> button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
1 Make sure the camera and
zzPrinting now begins.
Playback Mode
printer are off.
zzTo print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Connect the camera to the
printer.
Setting Menu
zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
zzOpen the cover. Holding the smaller
cable plug in the orientation shown, insert
the plug fully into the camera terminal.
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
• For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see
• RAW images cannot be printed.
Index
176
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Configuring Print Settings
Common Camera
Operations
Cropping Images before Printing
1 Access the printing screen.
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose [Cropping].
2 Configure the settings.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then choose an option by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
<m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
zzA cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
Default
Date
Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
Prints images with both the date and file number added.
–
P Mode
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
File No.
Both
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Off
Default
Off
Matches current printer settings.
–
zzTo move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
zzTo rotate the frame, turn the <7> dial.
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Uses information from the time of shooting to print under
optimal settings.
Setting Menu
On
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
Accessories
9
10
3 Print the image.
to print.
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Appendix
–
Cropping
Index
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
–
• Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
• Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
177
Cover
4 Choose a layout.
Still Images
Before Use
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the
<q><r> buttons to specify the number of
images per sheet.
Common Camera
Operations
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <m> button.
Camera Basics
5 Print the image.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Available Layout Options
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a paper size.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Bordered
Borderless
N-up
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Playback Mode
ID Photo
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
3 Choose a type of paper.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
Fixed Size
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
178
Cover
Movies
Still Images
Before Use
Printing Movie Scenes
Common Camera
Operations
Printing ID Photos
1 Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
at left is displayed.
1 Choose [ID Photo].
Basic Guide
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [c], and then press
the <m> button. The screen at left is
displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose the long and short side
length.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an item. Choose the
length by pressing the <q><r> buttons,
and then press the <m> button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
2 Choose a printing method.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [ ], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
printing method.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
3 Choose the printing area.
zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
area.
Playback Mode
3 Print the image.
Wi-Fi Functions
Movie Printing Options
Setting Menu
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Accessories
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of
paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed
time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].
9
10
4 Print the image.
Sequence
Appendix
Index
• To cancel printing in progress, press the <m> button.
• [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.
179
Cover
Still Images
• Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
Before Use
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Common Camera
Operations
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies,
as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
• Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
Camera Basics
• RAW images cannot be included in print list.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File
No.] at the same time.
• Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printers (sold separately).
• The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Other Shooting
Modes
Configuring Print Settings
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzPress the <n> button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab.
Choose and configure items as desired
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
9
10
Print Type
Index
Both
On
Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet.
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Images are printed with the shooting date.
–
Appendix
Index
Date
Off
On
Images are printed with the file number.
File No.
–
Off
On
All image print list settings are cleared after printing.
–
Clear DPOF
data
Off
180
Cover
Still Images
Before Use
Still Images
Common Camera
Operations
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Select Range] and press the <m>
button.
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab,
and then press the <m> button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose an image.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Other Shooting
Modes
zzYou can now specify the number of
copies.
Still Images
P Mode
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzIf you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the
<m> button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
3 Specify the number of prints.
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the number of prints
(up to 99).
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
zzTo set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
Index
zzPrinting quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button
to return to the menu screen.
181
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Adding Images to a Photobook
Common Camera
Operations
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choosing a Selection Method
Camera Basics
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
P Mode
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zzWhen images have been added to the
at left is displayed after you connect
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer. Press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [Print now], and then simply press
the <m> button to print the images in the
print list.
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
• After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction
Accessories
9
10
zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Appendix
Index
182
Cover
Still Images
Still Images
Before Use
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Common Camera
Operations
Adding Images Individually
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
1 Choose [Select].
Basic Guide
[Select] and press the <m> button.
Advanced Guide
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Still Images
2 Choose an image.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
P Mode
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
zz[ ] is displayed.
Playback Mode
zzTo remove the image from the photobook,
press the <m> button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button
to return to the menu screen.
9
10
Appendix
Index
183
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
10
Basic Guide
Appendix
Advanced Guide
Helpful information when using the camera
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Troubleshooting............................................. 185 Functions and Menu Tables.......................... 193 1Playback Tab Menu .......................................202
On-Screen Messages..................................... 188
2Print Tab Menu...............................................202
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode.......193
FUNC. Menu .......................................................195 Handling Precautions .................................... 203
Playback Mode
On-Screen Information .................................. 191
Shooting (Information Display)............................191
Playback (Detailed Information Display) .............192
4Shooting Tab Menu........................................198
Wi-Fi Functions
Specifications................................................. 203
3Set Up Tab Menu ...........................................202
My Menu Tab Menu.......................................202
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
184
Cover
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Shooting
Before Use
Cannot shoot.
Common Camera
Operations
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
Basic Guide
Power
Advanced Guide
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a
cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
• The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED
lighting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
No date stamp is added to images.
• Configure the [Date Stamp
added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time]
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
P Mode
• Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a
little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch
any metal objects.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after
charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
Playback Mode
[h] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and
The lens is not retracted.
• Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,
Wi-Fi Functions
[
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you
Setting Menu
The battery pack is swollen.
Accessories
9
10
• Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon
Customer Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Shots are out of focus.
• Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way
Index
Display on a TV
• Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
185
Cover
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
• To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button
halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting
is slower.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
• Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Other Shooting
Modes
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
• The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
P Mode
• Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
Cannot shoot planetarium stars well in [ ] mode.
• Shoot actual starry skies instead.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
• Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-
speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length
205).
Setting Menu
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the
memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
Index
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.
• This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
186
Cover
Zooming is not possible.
Before Use
Computer
modes.
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
Common Camera
Operations
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
Subjects look distorted.
• Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Basic Guide
• Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the <n> button down as
m
you press the <o> and < > buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press
Advanced Guide
the <q><r> buttons to choose [B], and then press the <m> button.
Playback
Camera Basics
Wi-Fi
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Playback is not possible.
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the < > button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or
on folder structure and file names.
• The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try
again.
Other Shooting
Modes
• The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display
according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
• Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
• There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that
have slow read speeds.
P Mode
• The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Cannot add a device/destination.
Playback Mode
• A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/
• To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your
• When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip
if computer performance is inadequate.
Wi-Fi Functions
Sound is not played during movies.
the movie is faint.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
• To add a computer, first install the CameraWindow application on your computer. Also
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
Appendix
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
Index
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
• Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera
supported channel manually.
187
Cover
Cannot send images.
• The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on
the destination device and resend the images.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
No memory card
• The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card
Basic Guide
• RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
• Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Advanced Guide
Memory card locked
• The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cannot record!
Cannot resize images for sending.
• Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.
• Movies cannot be resized.
• Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
Other Shooting
Modes
• If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported
a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
P Mode
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
• Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [
]
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Movies may take a long time to send.
Insufficient space on card
Playback Mode
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note
that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed.
•
Wi-Fi Functions
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Setting Menu
No Image.
Accessories
• When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount
of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any
necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the
memory card by erasing unnecessary images.
9
10
• The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Appendix
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play
back MOV
• Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
Index
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
• It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,
or images shot with another camera.
188
Cover
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to
category/Unselectable image./No identification information
• The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already
edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)
functions are not available for movies.
Lens Error
Before Use
• This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used
in dusty or sandy locations.
Common Camera
Operations
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Basic Guide
A camera error was detected (error number)
• If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have
been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Advanced Guide
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Invalid selection range
choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
File Error
Other Shooting
Modes
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Exceeded selection limit
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Print error
setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.
Playback Mode
Ink absorber full
• Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi Functions
Communication error
• An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented
printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially
available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer
card slot.
Setting Menu
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
• A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Naming error!
• The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest
supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and
the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached.
connection.
Index
• Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
• The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
189
Cover
No access points found
• Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
Before Use
• When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have
been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
• When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Common Camera
Operations
Insufficient space on server
• Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
IP address conflict
Check network settings
• Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
• Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
• You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices,
and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
Other Shooting
Modes
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
P Mode
• Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Sending failed
Memory card error
• If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
• There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive
images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card
with sufficient space.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Index
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
190
Cover
Recordable shots
Movie resolution
Digital zoom
magnification
tele-converter
Remaining time
Spot AE point frame
Date stamp
DR correction
Shutter speed
Electronic level
Aperture value
Exposure
compensation level
Hybrid Auto mode
Image stabilization
MF indicator
Exposure shift bar
Exposure level
Exposure
compensation bar
On-Screen Information
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Shooting (Information Display)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Focusing range
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Blink detection
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Shooting mode
Flash mode
Red-eye correction
Flash exposure
compensation /
Flash output level
Metering method
Camera shake
IS mode icon
Battery level
Still image
compression
Setting Menu
Display
Details
Accessories
9
10
Sufficient charge
Drive mode
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
Appendix
Focus bracketing
White balance
lamp correction
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
Index
(Blinking red)
[Charge the battery]
191
Cover
Group playback
Compression (image
/ Resolution
Still images:
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
Before Use
/ Frame rate (movies)
Movies: Playback
Common Camera
Operations
File size
Basic Guide
MP4 (movies)
Advanced Guide
• Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Current image no. /
Total no. of images
Battery level
Wi-Fi signal strength
Image editing
Movie compression
Folder number - File
Shooting date/time
Shutter speed
Aperture value
White balance
Mercury lamp
120)
Exit
P Mode
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial. No sound is played.)
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Exposure
compensation level
Playback speed
keep holding down the <m> button.)
Playback Mode
Focusing range
(
Wi-Fi Functions
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Manual focus
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Red-eye correction
High ISO NR
DR correction
Setting Menu
holding down the <m> button.)
Accessories
Metering method
9
10
)
*
c
Appendix
Flash output
Flash exposure
compensation
White balance
Index
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
Shadow correction
• During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or
Shooting mode
next clip) by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
192
Cover
Functions and Menu Tables
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Basic Guide
Shooting Mode
K
E
DBMG
Advanced Guide
I
SPt
E
Function
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
AUTO
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
1
1
1
–
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
80 – 12800
O
Other Shooting
Modes
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
P Mode
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
h
Z
!
2
2
2
–
*
*
*
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Playback Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Wi-Fi Functions
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
AF Lock (when assigned to the < > or movie button)
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
1
1
*
*
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
1
1
*
*
e
Index
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
8
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases.
*3 FE lock not available in [!] flash mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*4 In modes other than [E], AE lock and Exposure shift are only available when
shooting movies.
193
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Before Use
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Common Camera
Operations
Function
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
Display Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
O
Camera Basics
1
1
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
Display 1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
1
Display 2
*
*
Other Shooting
Modes
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
194
Cover
FUNC. Menu
Before Use
Shooting Mode
K
E
Common Camera
Operations
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Basic Guide
Function
Advanced Guide
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
O
O
P Mode
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
h
2
2
*
*
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
Playback Mode
2
2
2
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
Wi-Fi Functions
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
Setting Menu
3
3
4
*
*
*
Accessories
9
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Appendix
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Index
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Advanced settings not available.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*3 White balance is not available.
*4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and
skin tone.
195
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Before Use
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Common Camera
Operations
Function
1
1
*
*
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Basic Guide
–
–
Advanced Guide
2
1
1
*
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
1
1
*
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
*
*
][$
Other Shooting
Modes
1
1
Delay*3
*
*
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
1
P Mode
Shots*4
*
*
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
Playback Mode
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
1
1
*
*
Wi-Fi Functions
1
1
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories
9
10
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix
1
1
*
*
1
1
–
*
*
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Index
1
1
–
*
*
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*2 [ ] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
196
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Before Use
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Common Camera
Operations
Function
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
1
1
1
1
Advanced Guide
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting
Modes
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
P Mode
2
–
*
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
–
–
–
–
O
Playback Mode
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
197
Cover
4Shooting Tab Menu
Before Use
Shooting Mode
K
E
Common Camera
Operations
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Basic Guide
Function
1
1
1
1
1
1
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Face AiAF
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
2
Tracking AF
FlexiZone/Center*3
*
O
O
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
Standard
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
Off
1.5/2.0x
P Mode
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Playback Mode
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4
Off
O
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wi-Fi Functions
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Setting Menu
Off
O
O
O
O
Accessories
9
10
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix
Off
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
1
1
Index
Off
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
2x/4x
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
*3 [FlexiZone] in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes, otherwise [Center].
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.
198
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Before Use
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Common Camera
Operations
Function
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Peaking
On/Off
High/Low
Red/Blue/Yellow
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
Level
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Color
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Other Shooting
Modes
Flash Mode
Manual
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flash Exp. Comp
Flash Output
O
–
P Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
1st-curtain
Shutter Sync.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
2nd-curtain
Playback Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
Red-Eye Corr.
Off
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Wi-Fi Functions
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
On
O
–
Setting Menu
Safety FE
Off
O
Max ISO Speed
Accessories
9
10
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
–
O
O
Rate of Change
Appendix
Low/Standard/High
On/Off
1
1
Index
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
Center/AF Point
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
199
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Before Use
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Common Camera
Operations
Function
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
Auto/Off
1
1
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Off/Quick
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display Time
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Hold
Other Shooting
Modes
Display Info
Off/Detailed
O
P Mode
1
1
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
Playback Mode
Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
On/Off
Wi-Fi Functions
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off
Setting Menu
1
1
–
O
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
Accessories
9
10
1
1
IS Mode
Continuous
*
*
1
1
–
–
–
Shoot Only
*
*
Appendix
1
1
–
–
–
–
1
2
*
*
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
Dynamic IS
1
1
Index
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
200
Cover
Shooting Mode
K
E
Before Use
DBMG
I
SPt
E
Common Camera
Operations
Function
None/TC-DC58E
1
1
–
–
–
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide
Date Stamp
Off
1
1
1
1
Advanced Guide
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Date/Date & Time
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Include Stills/No Stills
O
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save
Other Shooting
Modes
On/Off
O
On/Off
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
–
P Mode
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
1
1
*
*
1
1
*
*
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
Playback Mode
1
1
Set
*
*
–
–
–
O
O
Wi-Fi Functions
–
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.
-
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
201
Cover
3Set Up Tab Menu
1Playback Tab Menu
Before Use
Item
List/Play Digest Movies
Smart Shuffle
Slideshow
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Item
File Numbering
Create Folder
Units
Ref. Page
Common Camera
Operations
Resize
Mute
Basic Guide
My Colors
Volume
Face ID Info
Transition Effect
Index Effect
Sound Options
Hints & Tips
Date/Time
Advanced Guide
Erase
Electronic Level
Video System
Ctrl via HDMI
Wi-Fi Settings
Copyright Info
Certification Logo Display
Language
Camera Basics
Protect
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rotate
Scroll Display
Group Images
Auto Rotate
Time Zone
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Favorites
Lens Retract
Eco Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Photobook Set-up
i-Contrast
Resume
Power Saving
LCD Brightness
Start-up Image
Format
P Mode
Red-Eye Correction
Cropping
Set Shortcut button
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Reset All
Playback Mode
2Print Tab Menu
Wi-Fi Functions
My Menu Tab Menu
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Select All Images
Clear All Selections
Print Settings
Ref. Page
Setting Menu
–
Print
Item
Ref. Page
Select Images & Qty.
Select Range
My Menu settings
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
202
Cover
Handling Precautions
Specifications
Before Use
•
•
The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Common Camera
Operations
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 12.1 million pixels
Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or
erase image data.
5x zoom: 6.1 (W) – 30.5 (T) mm
(35mm film equivalent: 28 (W) – 140 (T) mm)
Basic Guide
Lens Focal Length
Advanced Guide
Real-image type optical zoom viewfinder
Dioptric Adjustment Range: –3.0 to +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Coverage: Approx. 80%
Viewfinder
•
•
•
•
If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or
screen.
LCD Monitor
File Format
Data Type
Other Shooting
Modes
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1)
compliant
Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: H.264; Audio: MPEG2 AAC-LC (stereo))
P Mode
To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm
environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and
let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Interface
Playback Mode
•
•
If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
Wi-Fi Functions
Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
Power Source
Setting Menu
Dimensions (Based
on CIPA Guidelines)
108.8 x 75.9 x 40.3 mm (4.28 x 2.99 x 1.59 in.)
Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar
container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods
(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.
Accessories
9
10
Approx. 356 g (approx. 12.56 oz.; including the battery pack
and memory card)
Approx. 314 g (approx. 11.08 oz.; camera body only)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Appendix
Index
203
Cover
Wi-Fi Functions
Standards
Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card
Before Use
IEEE802.11b/g/n*
*2.4 GHz band only
Number of Shots per Memory Card
(Approx. shots)
Common Camera
Operations
Compression
Ratio
Recording Pixels
8 GB
32 GB
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Basic Guide
1379
5568
(Large)
12M/4000x3000
Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi Certified IBSS
Advanced Guide
Communication
Modes
2192
2431
8850
9814
Camera Basics
(Medium 1)
6M/2816x2112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 – 11 (PC2035/PC2059) or 1 – 13 (PC2010)
3721
15020
30040
52176
Supported Channels
Security
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
7442
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
(Medium 2)
Other Shooting
Modes
2M/1600x1200
12927
27291
40937
110150
165225
P Mode
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Screen On
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Approx. 360
Approx. 770
Approx. 480
RAW Images
4000x3000
–
446
1804
Number of Shots
Screen Off
Playback Mode
Eco Mode On
• The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
Wi-Fi Functions
Movie Recording
Time*1
Screen On
Screen On
Approx. 1 hour
• The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed
than with 4:3 images. However, since [ ] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080
pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images.
Setting Menu
Continuous
Shooting*2
Approx. 1 hour, 40 minutes
Approx. 7 hours
Accessories
9
10
Playback Time
Appendix
*1Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as
shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
Index
• The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the
Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
• Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less
than mentioned above.
• Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
204
Cover
Before Use
Recording Time per Memory Card
Shooting Range
Common Camera
Operations
Recording Time per Memory Card
Maximum Wide Angle Maximum Telephoto
Shooting Mode Focusing Range
Image Quality
(j)
(i)
8 GB
32 GB
1 cm – infinity
(0.4 in. – infinity)
40 cm – infinity
(1.3 ft. – infinity)
Basic Guide
–
30 min. 03 sec.
2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.
43 min. 29 sec.
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec.
Advanced Guide
5 cm – infinity
(2.0 in. – infinity)
40 cm – infinity
(1.3 ft. – infinity)
Camera Basics
1 – 50 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
e*
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 cm – infinity
(0.4 in. – infinity)
40 cm – infinity
(1.3 ft. – infinity)
• The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
Other modes
f*
Other Shooting
Modes
1 – 50 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
• Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the
recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in
–
P Mode
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
[
], [
] or [
], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [
].
8
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
• Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some
memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Playback Mode
Flash Range
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous Shooting Mode
W
Wi-Fi Functions
50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
50 cm – 4.5 m (1.6 – 15 ft.)
Maximum wide angle (j)
Speed
Setting Menu
Approx. 12.2 shots/sec.
Approx. 9.3 shots/sec.*
Maximum telephoto (i)
Accessories
9
10
Approx. 5.7 shots/sec.
Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.
Appendix
Index
* From the sixth shot.
• Based on Canon testing standards, using a 8 GB UHS-I memory card. Note that the
number of shots will vary depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other
factors.
205
Cover
Shutter Speed
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Before Use
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 16 VA (100 V) – 22 VA (240 V),
0.18 A (100 V) – 0.12 A (240 V)
8.4 V DC, 0.7 A
Approx. 1 hour 50 min. (when using NB-10L)
Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two indicators)
[
] mode, automatically set range
1 – 1/4000 sec.
Common Camera
Operations
250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,
20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,
1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200, 1/4000
Rated Output:
Charging Time:
Charge Indicator:
Basic Guide
Available values in [M] or [D] mode
(sec.)*
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Advanced Guide
Tele-Converter TC-DC58E (Sold Separately)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Zoom Factor:
Lens Construction:
Thread Diameter:
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ69.0 x 36.5 mm (ɸ2.72 x 1.44 in.)
Weight: Approx. 165 g (approx. 5.8 oz.)
* Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L.
1.4x
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
* In [M] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.
5 elements in 3 groups
58 mm*
Other Shooting
Modes
Aperture
f/number
f/1.8 – f/8.0 (W), f/2.8 – f/8.0 (T)
P Mode
f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0,
f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0
Available values in [B] mode*
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (Sold Separately)
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Camera Mount:
Thread Diameter:
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ63.8 x 54.8 mm (ɸ2.51 x 2.16 in.)
Weight: Approx. 36 g (approx. 1.3 oz.)
Bayonet
58 mm
Playback Mode
Battery Pack NB-10L
Wi-Fi Functions
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.4 V DC
920 mAh
Setting Menu
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Capacity:
Charging Cycles:
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions:
Weight:
Filter Adapter FA-DC58D (Sold Separately)
Approx. 300 times
Accessories
9
10
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ66.0 x 46.7 mm (ɸ2.60 x 1.84 in.)
Weight:
Approx. 58 g (approx. 2.0 oz.)
32.5 x 45.4 x 15.1 mm (1.28 x 1.79 x 0.59 in.)
Approx. 41 g (approx. 1.45 oz.)
Appendix
Bracket BKT-DC1 (Sold Separately)
Index
Dimensions (Max.): 220.0 x 32.0 x 19.0 mm (8.66 x 1.26 x 0.75 in.)
Weight: Approx. 90 g (approx. 3.2 oz.)
•
•
All data is based on tests by Canon.
Camera specifications or appearance are subject to change without
notice.
206
Cover
Dynamic Range Correction ................. 73
Slow synchro................................. 85
Index
FlexiZone (AF frame mode)................. 81
Before Use
E
Eco mode .......................................... 152
Editing
Focus check ...................................... 109
Focusing
CameraWindow (computer)............... 131
CameraWindow (smartphone)........... 130
Common Camera
Operations
A
AC adapter kit............................ 160, 165
Accessories ....................................... 160
AEB shooting....................................... 72
AE lock ................................................ 69
AF lock................................................. 85
Aspect ratio.......................................... 44
Basic Guide
Cropping.......................................119
i-Contrast..................................... 120
Red-eye correction...................... 121
Resizing images...........................118
AF frames...................................... 81
AF lock .......................................... 85
AF-point zoom............................... 47
Face select.................................... 84
MF peaking ................................... 79
Servo AF ....................................... 83
CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY ......................... 125, 127, 128
Advanced Guide
Center (AF frame mode)...................... 81
Clock.................................................... 27
Color (white balance)........................... 74
Connecting via an access point......... 134
Continuous shooting............................ 76
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Editing or erasing connection
information......................................... 147
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Focusing range
AUTO mode
(shooting mode)....................... 16, 23, 29
Electronic level .................................... 47
Erasing ...............................................114
Error messages ................................. 188
Exposure
Macro ............................................ 78
Underwater macro......................... 53
Other Shooting
Modes
Av (shooting mode) ............................. 93
P Mode
Focus lock ........................................... 81
Front dial...................................... 96, 107
FUNC. menu
B
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
FE lock .......................................... 87
Background defocus
(shooting mode)................................... 58
Basic operations............................ 24
Playback Mode
→
Batteries
Date/time (date/time battery)
F
Battery pack
D
Wi-Fi Functions
Face AiAF (AF frame mode)................ 82
Face self-timer (shooting mode).......... 61
Favorites.............................................117
FE lock................................................. 87
File numbering................................... 154
Flash
Date/time
G
Setting Menu
Charging........................................ 12
Level............................................ 191
Power saving................................. 21
Adding date stamps ...................... 38
Changing....................................... 15
Date/time battery........................... 15
Settings ......................................... 14
World clock.................................. 151
Accessories
9
10
H
Black and white images....................... 75
Appendix
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode)................................... 52
DC coupler......................................... 165
Index
→
Defaults
Reset all
HDMI cable........................................ 162
C
Digital tele-converter............................ 80
Digital zoom......................................... 35
DPOF................................................. 180
Drive mode .......................................... 76
High dynamic range
(shooting mode)................................... 55
C1/C2 (shooting mode) ....................... 99
Camera
Household power............................... 165
Flash exposure compensation ...... 86
On ................................................. 85
Reset all ...................................... 157
Camera access point mode............... 139
207
Cover
Multi-area White Balance .................... 46
My Colors .................................... 75, 120
Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 59
Software
I
Before Use
Saving images to a computer...... 174
→
Image quality
Compression ratio
Common Camera
Operations
N
(image quality)
Sounds .............................................. 150
S
Screen
Images
Basic Guide
→
Neck strap
Strap
Display period ............................... 49
Star nightscape (shooting mode) .. 62
Star time-lapse movie (shooting
Nostalgic (shooting mode)................... 56
Advanced Guide
→
Playback
Viewing
Display language........................... 16
Icons.................................... 191, 192
P
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Indicator............................................... 27
→
Menu
FUNC. menu, Menu
Photobook set-up .............................. 182
PictBridge .................................. 162, 176
→
ISO speed............................................ 70
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Searching .......................................... 106
Self-timer ............................................. 36
Super slow motion movie
(movie mode)....................................... 66
L
Other Shooting
Modes
2-second self-timer........................ 37
Customizing the self-timer............. 37
Face self-timer (shooting mode) ... 61
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) ... 60
Playback
Viewing
Lamp.............................................. 48, 49
Poster effect (shooting mode) ............. 55
Power ................................................ 160
Super vivid (shooting mode)................ 54
P Mode
M
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
T
Sending images................................. 142
Sending images to a computer.......... 127
Sending images to another camera... 126
Sending images to a printer............... 127
Sending images to a smartphone...... 126
Sending images to Web services ...... 126
Sepia tone images............................... 75
Servo AF.............................................. 83
Shadow correct.................................... 73
Shooting
Macro (focusing range)........................ 78
→
→
→
AC adapter kit
Battery charger
Battery pack
Tracking AF ................................... 38, 82
Traveling with the camera ................. 151
TV display.......................................... 163
Tv (shooting mode).............................. 92
Playback Mode
Memory cards........................................ 2
Menu
Printing .............................................. 176
P (shooting mode) ............................... 68
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Basic operations............................ 25
Accessories
9
10
Metering method.................................. 69
Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 59
Movies
Appendix
U
Q
→
Shooting date/time
Date/time
Quick (focusing range) ........................ 53
Index
Shooting information ............. 95, 191
R
V
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ........... 60
Smile (shooting mode)......................... 60
Snow (shooting mode)......................... 52
Editing ......................................... 122
Image quality
(resolution/frame rate)............. 46, 66
RAW .................................................... 88
Reset all............................................. 157
Image search .............................. 106
M (shooting mode)............................... 93
208
Cover
Index display ............................... 105
Slideshow.....................................110
TV display ................................... 163
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
W
White balance (color)........................... 74
Wi-Fi
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connecting and sending
images......................................... 126
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Wi-Fi functions................................... 124
Wi-Fi menu ........................................ 133
Wink self-timer (shooting mode).......... 60
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Z
Zoom ....................................... 17, 29, 35
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
209
Cover
•
Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Before Use
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
Common Camera
Operations
•
The camera’s model number is PC2035/
PC2059/PC2010. To identify your model,
check the label on the bottom of the
camera for a number beginning with PC.
The built-in WLAN module model is written
below.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
•
•
When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset
the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Country/Region of Purchase
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan
Other
WLAN Module Model
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
WM222
WM218
Other Shooting
Modes
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
•
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
•
•
Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than
as described in this guide.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
•
•
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Setting Menu
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certification labels from the product
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Accessories
9
10
According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services
(including this product) outside Japan.
Appendix
Index
•
Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to
or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
210
Cover
•
Unauthorized network access
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
Before Use
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
•
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP
enables PictBridge connections in network environments,
and the camera is also compatible with this standard.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
•
Only use networks you are authorized to use.
Wi-Fi Functions
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
•
Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
211
Cover
Battery Charger CB-2LC
FCC/IC Notice
Before Use
Model: PC2035 (including WLAN Module Model WM222, FCC ID: AZD222)
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Battery Charger CB-2LCE
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
212
Cover
FCC Notice
Before Use
(Digital Camera, Model PC2035 systems)
Common Camera
Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Trademarks and Licensing
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
•
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other Shooting
Modes
•
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
P Mode
•
•
•
App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
•
•
•
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
•
•
Setting Menu
•
•
•
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Accessories
9
10
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Appendix
Index
213
Cover
Disclaimer
Before Use
•
•
•
•
Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this
guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.
Common Camera
Operations
Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time
without prior notice.
Basic Guide
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
Advanced Guide
The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages
due to mistaken operation of the products.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
9
10
Appendix
Index
214
|
Whirlpool Ace082xh0 User Manual
Linear Barcode Reader Am Dpr User Manual
LG ACC98WK T User Manual
Lexmark X9350 User Manual
Lexmark All In One Printer X642 User Manual
KENWOOD NEXEDGE NX 322 User Manual
HP ELITEBOOK 1040 G4 User Manual
GE ARC13AHC User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 917.273780 User Manual
CANON TR8500 User Manual